You are on page 1of 297

Foreword

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle has been delivered to you with confidence. It has been produced using the latest techniques
and strict quality control.
This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many kilometres (miles) of driving pleasure.
Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information & Maintenance Booklet explains in detail the warranty coverage that applies to your vehicle.
Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, your NISSAN dealer will be glad to assist you with the extensive
resources available for you.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE


REMINDERS FOR SAFETY! This vehicle should not be modified. Modifications could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition,
Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and complete trip for damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be cov-
you and your passengers! ered under NISSAN warranties.
NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
READ FIRST THEN DRIVE SAFELY
ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for condi-
Before driving your vehicle, read this Owners Manual carefully. This will ensure
tions.
familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe
ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. operation of your vehicle.
Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat.
Throughout this manual the following symbols and words are used:
ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety fea-
tures to all occupants of the vehicle. WARNING
ALWAYS review this Owners Manual for important safety information. Indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious per-
WHEN READING THE MANUAL sonal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures described must be
followed precisely.
This manual includes information for all options available on this model. There-
fore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle. CAUTION

All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect Indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate per-
at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or sonal injury, or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-
designs at any time without notice and without obligation. cedures described must be followed carefully.
NOTE
Indicates additional helpful information.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING (4WD models)
This vehicle will handle and manoeuvre differently from an ordinary passenger
vehicle, because it has a higher centre of gravity for off-road use. As with other
vehicles with features of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or an accident.
Be sure to read On-pavement and off-road driving precautions and Four-
wheel drive (4WD) in the 5. Starting and driving section of this manual.

The NISSAN GREEN PROGRAM symbol indicates environmentally friendly


information and best practices.

BATTERY DISPOSAL
CAUTION
An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
This symbol means Do not do this or Do not let this happen.
Examples of the batteries that the vehicle contains:
Vehicle battery
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these point to the front of the vehicle.
Remote controller battery (for Intelligent Key and/or Remote keyless entry
system)

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.


Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor battery
Remote controller battery (for Mobile Entertainment system)
If in doubt, contact your local authority, or a NISSAN dealer, or a qualified work-
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the shop for advice on disposal.
illustration.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
m
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.
m

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Contents Illustrated table of contents 0
Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system 1

Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3


Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and
audio system 4

Starting and driving 5

In case of emergency 6

Appearance and care 7

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8

Technical information 9

Index 10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bag system......................................................... 0-2 HR16DE engine (Type A) ................................... 0-8


Exterior front and rear .............................................. 0-3 HR16DE engine (Type B) ................................... 0-8
Instrument and control layout ................................... 0-4 MR20DE engine ................................................. 0-9
Left (LHD) and Right-hand drive (RHD) Euro 4 K9K engine ............................................. 0-11
models ............................................................... 0-5 Euro 5 K9K engine ............................................. 0-11
Meters and gauges .................................................. 0-6 M9R engine........................................................ 0-12
Engine compartment................................................ 0-7 R9M engine........................................................ 0-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AIR BAG SYSTEM

NPA986

1. Pre-tensioner seat belt retractors (P. 1-12) 6. Front passenger air bag deactivate switch
(P. 1-17)
2. Side air bag modules (P. 1-14)
7. Diagnosis sensor unit
3. Curtain air bag modules (P.1-14)
4. Driver air bag module (P. 1-14)
5. Front passenger air bag module (P. 1-16)

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EXTERIOR FRONT AND REAR

9 Tyres (Tyres and wheels P. 8-31, P. 9-7, Flat


j
tyre P. 6-2)
10 Front view camera* (Around view monitor,
j
P. 4-4)
11 Back door (Door locks P. 3-12, Remote key-
j
less entry system P. 3-3)
12 Rear view camera* (Rear-view monitor, P. 4-2,
j
around view monitor, P. 4-4)
13 Rear window (Defogger switch P. 2-23, Wiper
j
and washer switch P. 2-21, Wiper replace-
ment P. 8-23, Washer fluid P. 8-16)
14 Rear combination light (Switch P. 2-24, Loca-
j
tion and bulb replacement P. 8-25)
15 Fuel filler lid (P. 3-15)
j
16 Doors (Keys P. 3-2, Door locks P. 3-9,
j
Remote keyless entry system P. 3-3)
17 Outside rear-view mirrors (P. 3-17)
j
Side view camera* (Around view monitor,
P. 4-4)
NPA1091 * where fitted

1 Towing eye (P. 6-15)


j P. 2-21, Wiper replacement P. 8-22, Washer
fluid P. 8-16)
2 Bonnet (P. 3-14)
j
5 Side turn signal light (P. 2-24, Location and
j
3 Headlights, front side lights, turn signal lights
j bulb replacement P. 8-27)
(Switch P. 2-24, Location and bulb replace-
ment P. 8-25) 6 C-View (Glass roof)* (P. 2-36)
j
4 Windscreen (Wiper and washer switch
j 7 Power windows (P. 2-34)
j
8 Roof rail* (P. 2-32)
j

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL LAYOUT

NIC1601

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


LEFT (LHD) AND RIGHT-HAND DRIVE Fuel filler lid opener lever (P. 3-15)
(RHD) MODELS 13. Steering wheel lock lever (P. 4-16)
1. Drivers main power window switch (P. 2-35) 14. Ignition switch or Ignition knob (Intelligent Key
2. Vents (P. 4-12) models) (P. 5-6, 5-8)

3. Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-24) 15. Climate controls (P. 4-12)

4. Horn (P. 2-29) 16. High level vent control*1 (P. 4-12)

5. Meters, gauges, and warning/indicator lights Storage*1 (P. 4-31)


(P. 2-2, 2-3) 17. Gear selector lever (P. 5-12)
6. Wiper/washer switch (P. 2-21) 18. Handbrake (P. 3-16)
Headlight cleaner*1 (P. 2-28) 19. 4WD mode control*1 (P. 5-24)
7. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-28) Power door lock switch (P. 3-10)
8. Passenger power window switch (P. 2-36) Seat heater switches*1 (P. 2-29)
1
9. ESP OFF switch* (P. 5-40) 20. Power outlet (P. 2-30)
Headlight aiming control*1 (P. 2-27) 21. Audio system (P. 4-21, 4-23)
Outside mirror folding switch*1 (P. 3-18) NISSAN Connect*2
Outside mirror remote control (P. 3-18) Rearview monitor*1 (P. 4-2)
Stop/Start System OFF switch* (P. 5-21) Around view monitor*1 (P. 4-4)
10. Fuse box (P. 8-23) 22. Glove box (P. 2-31)
1
11. Steering wheel switches* 23. Front passenger air bag deactivate switch
Audio control*1 (P. 4-43) (P. 1-17)
*1 where fitted
Cruise control*1 (P. 5-29)
*2 Refer to the separately provided NISSAN Con-
Speed limiter*1 (P. 5-31) nect Owners Manual.
Trip computer display control*1 (P. 2-16) See the page number indicated in parentheses
12. Bonnet lock release lever (P. 3-14) for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


METERS AND GAUGES

10 Gear indicator (CVT and AT models only)


j
(P. 2-14)
j
11 switch (Settings control and trip computer
control) (P. 2-11)
12 Fuel gauge (P. 2-2)
j

NIC1560

1 Tachometer (P. 2-2)


j 5 Vehicle information display (P. 2-11)
j
2 Warning/indicator lights (P. 2-3)
j 6 Speedometer (P. 2-2)
j
3 Turn signal (P. 2-26)
j 7 Engine coolant temperature gauge (P. 2-2)
j
Hazard warning indicator lights (P. 2-28) 8
j switch (Twin trip odometer control and
brightness level control) (P. 2-11)
4 Outside temperature display/Clock display.
j
Clock setting, see (P. 2-19) 9 Odometer/Twin trip odometer display
j
(P. 2-16)

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE COMPARTMENT

HR16DE ENGINE (Type A)


1 Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-6)
j
2 Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (RHD models)
j
(P. 8-15)
3 Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)
j
4 Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (LHD models)
j
(P. 8-15)
5
j Air cleaner filter (P. 8-21)
6
j Fuses/fusible link box (P. 8-23)
7
j Battery (P. 8-17)
8
j Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)
9
j Window washer/headlight cleaner (where fit-
ted) fluid reservoir (P. 8-16)

NDI905

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


HR16DE ENGINE (Type B)
1 Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-6)
j
2 Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (RHD models)
j
(P. 8-15)
3 Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)
j
4 Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (LHD models)
j
(P. 8-15)
5
j Air cleaner filter (P. 8-21)
6
j Fuses/fusible link box (P. 8-23)
7
j Battery (P. 8-17)
8
j Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)
9
j Window washer/headlight cleaner (where fit-
ted) fluid reservoir (P. 8-16)

NDI1270

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MR20DE ENGINE
1 Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-6)
j
2 Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (RHD)
j
models), Brake fluid reservoir (CVT (RHD)
models) (P. 8-15)
3 Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)
j
4 Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (LHD)
j
models), Brake fluid reservoir (CVT (LHD)
models) (P. 8-15)
5
j Air cleaner filter (P. 8-21)
6
j Fuses/fusible link box (P. 8-23)
7
j Battery (P. 8-17)
8
j Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)
9
j Window washer/headlight cleaner (where fit-
ted) fluid reservoir (P. 8-16)

NDI906

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Euro 4 K9K engine
1 Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-6)
j
2 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (RHD models)
j
(P. 8-15)
3 Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)
j
4 Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (LHD models)
j
(P. 8-15)
5
j Air cleaner filter (P. 8-21)
6
j Fuses/fusible link box (P. 8-23)
7
j Battery (P. 8-17)
8
j Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)
9
j Window washer/headlight cleaner (where fit-
ted) fluid reservoir (P. 8-16)
10 Fuel filter priming bulb (P. 8-13)
j

NDI908

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Euro 5 K9K engine
1 Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-6)
j
2 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (RHD models)
j
(P. 8-15)
3 Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (LHD models)
j
(P. 8-15)
4
j Air cleaner filter (P. 8-21)
5
j Fuses/fusible link box (P. 8-23)
6
j Battery (P. 8-17)
7
j Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)
Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)
8 Window washer/headlight cleaner (where fit-
j
ted) fluid reservoir (P. 8-16)
9 Fuel filter priming bulb (P. 8-13)
j

NDI1065

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M9R ENGINE
1 Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-6)
j
2 Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (RHD)
j
models), Brake fluid reservoir (AT (RHD)
models) (P. 8-15)
3 Engine oil filler cap and dipstick (P. 8-8)
j
4 Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (LHD)
j
models), Brake fluid reservoir (AT (LHD)
models) (P. 8-15)
5
j Air cleaner filter (P. 8-21)
6
j Fuses/fusible link box (P. 8-23)
7
j Battery (P. 8-17)
8
j Window washer/headlight cleaner (where fit-
ted) fluid reservoir (P. 8-16)
9 Fuel filter priming bulb (P. 8-13)
j

NDI975

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


R9M ENGINE
1 Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-6)
j
2 Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (RHD)
j
models), Brake fluid reservoir (AT (RHD)
models) (P. 8-15)
3 Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)
j
4 Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (LHD)
j
models), Brake fluid reservoir (AT (LHD)
models) (P. 8-15)
5
j Air cleaner filter (P. 8-21)
6
j Fuses/fusible link box (P. 8-23)
7
j Battery (P. 8-17)
8
j Oil dipstick (P. 8-8)
9
j Window washer/headlight cleaner (where fit-
ted) fluid reservoir (P. 8-16)
10 Fuel filter assembly (P. 8-13)
j

NDI1264

Illustrated table of contents 0-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


NOTE

0-14 Illustrated table of contents

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system

Seats....................................................................... 1-2 Pre-tensioner seat belt system ................................. 1-12


Front seats ......................................................... 1-2 Supplemental Restraint System (air bag system) ...... 1-13
Rear seat(s)........................................................ 1-3 Air bag system.................................................... 1-14
Armrests (where fitted) ....................................... 1-5 Air bag warning labels ........................................ 1-16
Head restraints ................................................... 1-5 Air bag warning light ........................................... 1-16
Active head restraints (front seats) ...................... 1-6 Front passenger air bag indicator light ................ 1-17
Seat belts ................................................................ 1-6 Child restraints ........................................................ 1-18
Seat belt warnings .............................................. 1-6 Precautions on child restraint usage.................... 1-18
Precautions on seat belt usage ........................... 1-7 Installation of a child restraint system on the
Child safety ........................................................ 1-8 front passenger seat ........................................... 1-23
Pregnant women ................................................ 1-8 Installation of a child restraint system on rear
Injured persons................................................... 1-9 seats .................................................................. 1-24
Three-point type seat belts.................................. 1-9 ISOFIX system (where fitted).............................. 1-26
Seat belt maintenance ........................................ 1-11 Top tether strap for child restraint ....................... 1-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SEATS

WARNING
Closely supervise children when they are FRONT SEATS
around the vehicle to prevent them from play-
Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving. ing and being locked in the luggage compart-
The seat may move suddenly and could cause ment where they could be seriously injured.
loss of control of the vehicle. Keep the vehicle locked with the rear seat-
back securely latched when not in use, and
After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to prevent children from having access to the
make sure it is securely locked. vehicles keys.
The seatback should not be reclined any more
than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most
effective when the passenger sits well back
and upright in the seat. If the seatback is re-
clined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt
and being injured is increased.
When returning the seatbacks to the upright
position, be certain that they are completely
secured in the latched position. If they are not
completely secured, passengers may be in-
jured in an accident or sudden stop. When
operating the seatback release always rock
the seatback afterward to check that it is
locked.
When the vehicle is being used to carry cargo,
properly secure all cargo to help prevent it NDI1100
from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo
higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could cause per- Adjustment
sonal injury. 1 Slide the seat forward and backward
j
Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area 2 Reclining the seatback
j
or on the rear seat when it is in the folded-
down position. Use of these areas by passen- 3 Lift or lower the seat (drivers side only)
j
gers without proper restraints could result in 4 Lumbar support (where fitted)
j
serious injury in an accident or sudden stop.

1-2 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


REAR SEAT(S) CAUTION is folded past the vertical position. If the lever is
released early the seat will go into Easy entry
Always ensure that the seat belt is not trapped in
mode, see Easy entry to the 3rd row (7-seater)
the release lever or any other vehicle part.
later in this section.
3. Fold the seat forward.
To return the 2nd row outer seat to the seating posi-
tion, pull and hold the lever j 2 up to push the
seatback up until it locks into position. Pull the lever
again to set the angle of the seatback as desired.
Pull the head restraint into the correct position for
NPA928Z the occupant using the seat.
5seater
NPA977
Folding (5-seater)
The luggage compartment loading capacity can be
increased by folding the rear seats forward. Adjustment 2nd row (7-seater)
To fold the seat: Pull the lever j
1 up while you slide the seat forward
or backward to the desired position. Release the
1. Insert the side seat belt tongue into the slot lo-
lever to lock the seat in position. Rock the seat to
cated on the rear door pillar j
1 as illustrated.
check the slides have locked. Pull the lever j 2 to
2. Release the seatback lock by pulling on the latch set the angle of the seatback as desired. NPA978
j2.
Folding 2nd row (7-seater)
3.
3. Fold the seat forward j To fold the centre seat:
To fold the outer seats:
To return the seat to an upright position: 1. Push the release button of the head restraint and
1. Push the release button of the head restraint and
1. Make sure the seat belt is clear of the seat latch push the head restraint down. See Head push the head restraint down. See Head
mechanism. restraints later in this section. restraints later in this section.
2. Lift the seatback up and push firmly onto the 2. Release the seatback lock by pulling the lever j
2 2. Make sure the seat belt tongue of the centre seat
latch. up. The lever must be held up until the seatback is in the store position, see Fastening the seat
belts later in this section.
3. If the red lock tab is visible then the seat has not
latched properly release and then re-latch the 3. Release the seatback lock by pulling the strap
seat. j1.

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4. Fold the seatback forward. The seat will lock into position. Rock the seat to 4. Fold the seatback forward.
confirm it is locked in position. Adjust the seat if
To return the 2nd row centre seat to its seating posi- To return the 3rd row seat to its seating position,
necessary, see Adjustment 2nd row (7-seater)
tion, pull the strap to push the seatback up until it pull the strap to pull the seatback up until it locks
earlier in this section.
latches into position. Pull the strap again to set the into position. Pull the strap again to set the angle of
angle of the seatback as desired. Pull the head re- NOTE the seatback as desired. Pull the head restraint into
straint into the correct position for the occupant us- the highest position.
ing the seat. Instead of using the latch, it is also possible to
pull the lever j 2 up. Pull the seatback past
the vertical position and release the lever. The
seat will slide forward.
The 2nd row centre seat slides forward to-
gether with the right outer seat.

NPA981

Easy entry to the 3rd row (7-seater)


1. The seating positions on the 2nd row can be slid
forward for easy entry or exit from the 3rd row NPA979

seat. To slide the 2nd row bench seat, lift up the


latch j1 located on the upper corner of the
seatback and pull the seatback forward. When Folding 3rd row (7-seater)
pulling the seatback, the seat bench then slides 1. Push the release button of the head restraint and
forward. push the head restraint down. See Head
2. To return the seat to its seating position, push restraints later in this section.
the seat bench rearward then lift the seatback. 2. Attach the side seat belt tongue to the stowage
hook located on the rear pillar j
1 as illustrated.
3. Release the seatback lock by pulling the strap
j2.

1-4 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ARMRESTS (where fitted) 3. Rear armrest (7seater) j
C
Pull the strap j
1 at the centre seat bench and lay
the centre seatback/armrest horizontally.
HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNING
Do not drive and/or ride in the vehicle with
the head restraint removed. This can be dan-
gerous. NPA925Z

Front and Rear (where fitted) seat head restraints


Head restraints should be adjusted properly
as they may provide significant protection Adjustment
against injury in an accident. Check the height
after someone else uses the seat. 1. Pull up the head restraint to raise to the proper
position.
If the head restraints are removed for any rea-
2. Push in the lock knob as illustrated to lower the
son, they should be securely stored to pre-
vent them from causing injury to passengers head restraint to the proper position.
or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden Adjust the head restraint so that the centre is level
braking or an accident. with your ears.
7seater: The head restraints of the 3rd row
should always be put into the highest position
when the seat is occupied.
NPA980

1. Front armrest j
A
Slide the console box lid forwards to use as an
armrest.
2. Rear armrest (5seater) j
B
Pull the armrest of the rear seat and lay it horizon-
tally.

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SEAT BELTS

ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINTS (front ing its backward movement and by helping to ab-
seats) sorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash
type injuries.
Active head restraints are effective for collisions at
low to medium speeds in which it is said that whip-
lash injury occurs most.
Active head restraints operate only in certain rear-
end collisions. After the collision, the head restraints
return to their original positions.
NPA1051
Properly adjust the active head restraints as de-
scribed in the previous section.
SPA1025Z

WARNING
7seater: Seat belts for 3rd row seats are not
WARNING part of the seat belt warning monitoring system.
Always adjust the head restraints properly as SEAT BELT WARNINGS
specified in the previous section. Failure to do
so can reduce the effectiveness of the active A Driver and front passenger
j
head restraint. The seat belt warning lights, located in the instru-
Active head restraints are designed to supple- ment panel j A , will light up if the driver and/or front
ment other safety systems. Always wear seat passenger seat belts have not been fastened. See
belts. No system can prevent all injuries in an Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders in
accident. the 2. Instruments and controls section for further
details.
Do not attach anything to the head restraint
stalks. Doing so could impair the active head B Rear passengers
j
restraints function.
The rear passenger seat belt warning is shown in
The head restraint moves forward utilising the force the vehicle information display j
B . See Vehicle in-
that the seatback receives from the occupant in a formation display in the 2. Instruments and
rear-end collision. The movement of the head re- controls section.
straint helps support the occupants head by reduc-
The seat belt warning alerts the driver and/or front
passenger if a (rear) seat belt is not securely fas-

1-6 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


tened. The seat belt warning shows a filled circle PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position WARNING
USAGE
and an empty circle when the related seat belt has Be sure to observe the following warnings when
been securely fastened, or after approximately 35 using seat belts. Failure to do so could increase
seconds after engine start, or when acknowledged the chance and/or severity of injury in an acci-
by the driver pushing the steering wheel switch j i dent.
(where fitted).
Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony
NOTE structure of the body, and should be worn low
across the front of the pelvis or the pelvis,
If there is a change in (2nd row) rear seat belt
chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearing
status during a journey then the applicable
the lap section of the belt across the abdomi-
symbol for any unbuckled seat will show again
nal area must be avoided.
for a further 35 seconds. SSS0136Z

The front passenger seat belt warning light


Sit upright and well back No modifications or additions should be made
will not illuminate if the seat is unoccupied. by the user which will either prevent the seat
belt adjusting devices from operating to re-
Seat belts for 3rd row seats (where fitted) are move slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly
not part of the seat belt warning monitoring from being adjusted to remove slack.
system.
Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as
possible, consistent with comfort to provide
the protection for which they have been de-
signed. A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
SSS0134Z Care should be taken to avoid contamination
Sit upright and well back of the webbing with polishes, oils and chemi-
cals, and particularly battery acid. Cleaning
Your chances of being injured in an accident and/or
may safely be carried out using mild soap and
the severity of injury may be greatly reduced if you
water. The belt should be replaced if webbing
are wearing your seat belt and it is properly ad-
becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged.
justed. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of
your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, It is essential to replace the entire assembly
even if your seating position is equipped with an air after it has been worn in a severe impact even
bag. if damage to the assembly is not obvious.

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Belts should not be worn with straps twisted. function in the system. Have the system Children
checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
Each belt assembly must only be used by one
workshop. Children who are too large for child restraints should
occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt around be seated and restrained by the seat belts that are
a child being carried on the occupants lap. Always route the shoulder belt over your provided.
shoulder and across your chest. Never run
Every occupant in this vehicle should wear a
the belt under your arm. Serious injury can The use of a booster seat (commercially available)
seat belt at all times. may help to avoid the shoulder belt coming across
occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.
the face or neck area of a childs seating position.
Never carry more people in the vehicle than
Position the lap belt as low as possible The booster seat should raise the child so that the
there are seat belts.
AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top,
All seat belt assemblies, including retractors
CHILD SAFETY middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low
and attaching hardware, should be inspected on the hips. The booster seat should fit the vehicles
by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop af- seat. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt
ter any collision. NISSAN recommends that is no longer on or near the face and neck, use the
all seat belt assemblies in use during a colli- shoulder belt without the booster seat.
sion should be replaced unless the collision
was minor and the belts show no damage and WARNING
continue to operate properly. Seat belt assem-
blies not in use during a collision should also Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and
be inspected and replaced if either damage do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the
or improper operation is noted. vehicle is moving.

Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has been ac- SSS0099Z PREGNANT WOMEN
tivated, it cannot be re-used. It must be re-
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
placed together with the retractor. See a
Infants or small children seat belts. Contact your doctor for specific recom-
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
mendations. The seat belt should be worn snug,
NISSAN recommends that infants or small children
Removal and installation of the pre-tensioner
should be seated in a child restraint on the rear
always position the lap belt as low as possible
seat belt system components should be done around the hips, place the shoulder belt over your
seats if available. According to accident statistics,
by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/
children are safer when properly restrained in the
ONLY. shoulder belt over your abdominal area.
rear seat than in the front seat. See Child restraints
If the seat belt warning light glows continu- later in this section. You should choose a child re-
ously while the ignition switch is in the ON straint system which fits your vehicle and always fol-
position, all doors are closed and occupied low the manufacturers instructions for installation
seat belts are fastened, it may indicate a mal- and use.

1-8 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


INJURED PERSONS CAUTION
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat The seat belt retractor is designed to lock dur-
belts, depending on the injury. Check with your doc- ing a sudden impact. A slow pulling motion
tor for specific recommendations. will permit the belt to move and allow you
some freedom of movement in the seat.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTS
Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle
should wear a seat belt at all times.
Fastening the seat belts NPA966

1. Adjust the seat. 2nd row rear centre (7-seater)

2nd row centre seat (7-seater)


WARNING
a. Unclip the seat belt buckles from the (magnetic)
The seatback should not be reclined any more ceiling stowage point j1.
NPA827Z
than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most
effective when the passenger sits well back 2nd row centre seat (5-seater) b. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the ceiling retrac-
and upright in the seat. If the seat is reclined, tor and pass the buckles through the comfort
2nd row centre seat (5-seater)
the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being loop j2.
injured is increased. a. Unclip the seat belt buckles from the ceiling
c. Insert the end tongue into the buckle with the
stowage point.
black button j
3 until it clicks.
b. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the ceiling retrac-
d. Pull the second tongue and insert it into the
tor and insert the end tongue into the buckle with
buckle with the red button j
4 until it clicks.
the black button j 1 until it clicks.
2
c. Pull the tongue and insert it into the buckle j
until it clicks.

SSS0292Z

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and


insert the tongue into the buckle until it clicks.

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Unfastening the seat belts

WARNING
Make sure, when releasing the centre seat belt
from the 2nd row, that the seat belt tongues do
not come into contact with any occupants on the
3rd row.
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the
NPA972 SSS0467Z
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract.
3rd row rear (7-seater) 2nd row centre seat (5-seater)
3rd row outer seat (7-seater) 3. Position the lap belt portion low on the hips as Rear centre seat:
shown.
a. Unclip the end tongue from stowage hook on the a. Press the red button on the inner buckle j2 . The
side trim j
1. 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion towards the retrac- seat belt will automatically retract to the outer
tor to take up extra slack. Make sure the shoul- buckle with the black button j 1.
b. Insert the end tongue into the buckle with the
der belt is routed over your shoulder and snug
black button until it clicks j
2. b. To fully stow the seat belt, press the black but-
across your chest.
c. Pull the second tongue and insert it into the ton on the outer buckle j 1 . The seat belt will
buckle with the red button j3 until it clicks. The retract fully.
WARNING
tongue holder can be slid to a preferred position c. Stow the seat belt buckles in the ceiling stowage
on the webbing for easy access the next time the The seat belt should rest on the middle of point.
seat belt is used. the shoulder. It must not rest against the
neck. 2nd row centre seat (7-seater)

Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted a. Press the red button on the inner buckle j4 . The
in any way. seat belt will automatically retract to the outer
buckle with the black button j 3.
b. While holding the seat belt, press the black but-
ton on the outer buckle j 3 . The seat belt will
retract fully.
c. Stow the seat belt buckles in the ceiling stowage
point.

1-10 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3rd row outer seat (7-seater) the centre of the shoulder. Release the adjustment SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.
a. Press the red button on the inner buckle j3 . The To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild
seat belt will automatically retract to the outer soap solution or any solution recommended for
buckle with the black button j 2. WARNING
cleaning upholstery or carpets. Then brush it,
If desired, the 3rd row seatback can be folded After adjustment, release the adjustment but- wipe with a cloth and allow it to dry in the shade.
flat for further information see Folding 3rd ton and check by moving the shoulder belt Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they
row (7-seater) earlier in this section. assembly up and down to make sure the are completely dry.
shoulder belt anchor is securely fixed in posi-
b. Press the black button to release the end tongue. tion. If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of
When the seat belt has retracted fully, place the the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract
end tongue onto stowage hook j 1 . Move the The seat belt should be away from your face slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean,
tongue holder downwards if required. and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. dry cloth.
Checking the seat belt operation Periodically check to see whether the seat
belt and the metal components such as buck-
Your seat belt retractors are designed to lock the les, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and an-
belt movement in two separate situations: chors work properly. If loose parts, deteriora-
When the belt is pulled quickly from the retrac- tion, cuts or other damage to the webbing is
tor. found, the entire belt assembly should be re-
placed.
When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
To increase your confidence in the belts, check the
NPA816Z
operation as follows:
Take place in the seat for which you wish to check
the belt operation. Grasp the shoulder belt and pull
Shoulder belt height adjustment (front quickly forward. The retractor should lock and re-
seats only) strict further belt movement.
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted If the retractor does not lock during these checks or
to the position best for you (see Precautions on if you have any questions about the seat belt opera-
seat belt usage earlier in this section). tion, see a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
To adjust, depress the adjustment button as illus-
trated and move the shoulder belt anchor to the
appropriate position, so that the belt passes over

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT
SYSTEM

WARNING
propriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect The air bag warning light remains on after ap-
disposal procedures could cause personal in- proximately 7 seconds.
The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be reused jury.
The air bag warning light flashes intermittently.
after activation. It must be replaced together The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system is acti-
with the retractor as a unit. vated in conjunction with the front air bag system. It The air bag warning light does not come on at
all.
If the vehicle is involved in a frontal collision helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle is in-
Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental Re-
but the pre-tensioner is not activated, be sure volved in certain types of collisions by restraining
to have the pre-tensioner system checked the seat occupants via the seat belt retractor. straint System (SRS) and/or pre-tensioner seat belt
and, if necessary, replaced by a NISSAN may not function properly. It must be checked and
The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belts
dealer or qualified workshop. repaired.
retractor. These seat belts are used in the same way
No unauthorised changes should be made to as conventional seat belts. When selling your vehicle, we request that you in-
form the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt sys-
any components or wiring of the pre-tensioner Additionally, the drivers side pre-tensioner seat belt
seat belt system. This is to prevent accidental tem and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
system is also equipped with a lap pre-tensioner.
activation of the pre-tensioner seat belt or in this Owners Manual.
Both the retractor pre-tensioner and lap pre-ten-
damage to the pre-tensioner seat belt opera- sioner provide significant protection against injury in
tion. Tampering with the pre-tensioner seat an accident and increase the safety performance of
belt system may result in serious personal in- your vehicle.
jury.
When the pre-tensioner seat belt system activates,
Work on and around the pre-tensioner system smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard.
should be done by an authorised NISSAN The smoke is harmless, but care should be taken
dealer or qualified workshop. Installation of not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking.
electrical equipment should also be done by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. Unau- When the ignition switch is in the ON or START
thorised electrical test equipment and prob- position, the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
ing devices should not be used on the pre- air bag warning light will illuminate. The SRS air bag
tensioner seat belt system. warning light will turn off after approximately 7 sec-
onds if the system is operational. If any of the follow-
If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner or ing conditions occur, the air bag and/or pre-ten-
scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer or sioner seat belt need servicing and your vehicle must
qualified workshop. Correct pre-tensioner be taken to the nearest NISSAN dealer or qualified
disposal procedures are set forth in the ap- workshop.

1-12 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (air bag system)

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section START position, the air bag warning light will illu-
contains important information concerning the driver minate. The air bag warning light will turn off
and front passenger air bags, side air bags, curtain after approximately 7 seconds if the system is
air bags and pre-tensioner seat belt system. operational. See Warning/indicator lights and
audible reminders in the 2. Instruments and
Front air bag system: this system can help cushion
controls section for further details.
the impact force to the face and chest of the driver
and front passenger in certain frontal collisions. The air bag will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON or START position.
NOTE
For further information about the front passen- WARNING NPA926Z
ger air bag deactivation system see Front pas- Correct (rear) seating positions
senger air bag deactivation system later in this Driver and front passenger air bags:
section. The air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the WARNING
Side air bag system: this system can help cushion event of a side impact, rear impact, roll over,
the impact force to the chest area of the driver and or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear Never let children ride unrestrained or extend
your seat belts to help reduce the risk or se- their hands or face out of the window. Do not
front passenger in certain side impact collisions.
verity of injury in various kinds of accidents. attempt to hold them on your lap or in your
The side air bag is designed to inflate on the side
arms. Some examples of dangerous riding
where the vehicle is impacted. The seat belts and the air bags are most ef- positions are shown in the previous illustra-
Curtain air bag system: this system can help cush- fective when you are sitting back and upright tions.
ion the impact force to the head of an occupant in in the seat. Air bags inflate with great force. If
the front and rear outer seating position. Curtain air you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting Children may be severely injured or killed if
sideways or out of position in any way, you not properly restrained when the supplemen-
bags are designed to inflate on the side where the
are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash tal front air bags or supplemental side air bags
vehicle is impacted.
and may also receive serious or fatal injuries inflate. Preteens and children should be prop-
SRS is designed to supplement the crash protec- from the air bag if you are up against it when erly restrained in the rear seat if possible.
tion provided by the driver and front passenger seat it inflates.
belts and is not designed to substitute them. Seat
belts should always be correctly worn and the driver
and front passenger seated a suitable distance away
from the steering wheel, instrument panel and front
door finishers. For additional information, see Seat
belts earlier in this section.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON or

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ting in the front seat to extend their hand out cupants with a history of breathing difficulties, such
of the window or lean against the door. as asthma, should get fresh air promptly.
When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto
the seatback of the front seat. If the side air
bag inflates, the occupant may be seriously
injured. Be especially careful with children,
who should always be properly restrained.
Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks.
They may interfere with side air bag inflation.
SSS0100Z
NOTE
NPA849Z
Never install a child restraint in the front seat For an overview see Air bag system in the 0. Il-
5seater
without first deactivating the front passenger lustrated table of contents section.
air bag. An inflating supplemental front air bag
could seriously injure or kill your child. For
AIR BAG SYSTEM
additional information, see Child restraints Front air bags
later in this section.
The drivers air bag is located in the centre of the
steering wheel; the front passenger air bag is
WARNING mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The
Side and curtain air bags: air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity
frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the
The side and curtain air bag ordinarily will not forces in another type of collision are similar to those
inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not NPA974
impact or lower severity side collision. Always inflate in certain frontal collisions. Conclusions 7seater
wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or should not be drawn on the air bags operation ac-
severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. cording to the vehicles state. Side and curtain air bags
The seat belts, side and curtain air bags are When the supplemental front air bags inflate, a fairly The supplemental side air bags are located in the
most effective when you are sitting well back loud noise may be heard, followed by a release of outside of the seatback of the front seats. The
and upright in the seat. Side and curtain air smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indi- supplemental curtain air bags are located in the roof
bags inflate with great force. Do not allow any- cate a fire. However, care should be taken not to side trims. The supplemental side air bags and cur-
one to place hands, legs or face near the side inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Oc- tain air bags are designed to inflate in higher sever-
and curtain air bags. Do not allow anyone sit- ity side collisions, although they may inflate if the

1-14 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


forces in another type of collision are similar to those occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag nected. Unauthorised electrical test equip-
of a higher severity side impact. They are designed modules during inflation. The side air bag and cur- ment and probing devices should not be used
to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. tain air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is on the air bag system.
They may not inflate in certain side collisions. Ve- over. * SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow
hicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indica- insulation either just before the harness con-
tion of proper supplemental side air bag operation. WARNING nectors or on the complete harness, for easy
identification.
When the supplemental side air bag and curtain air Directly after inflation, several air bag system
bag inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, fol- components will be hot. Do not touch them;
lowed by a release of smoke. This smoke is not you may severely burn yourself.
harmful and does not indicate a fire. However, care
should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irri- No unauthorised changes should be made to
tation and choking. Occupants with a history of any components or wiring of the air bag sys-
breathing difficulties, such as asthma, should get tem. This is to prevent accidental inflation of
fresh air promptly. the air bag or damage to the air bag system.

Supplemental side air bags, along with the use of Tampering with the air bag system may result
seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the in serious personal injury. Tampering includes
chest of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help making changes to the steering wheel and NPA1032

to cushion the impact force to the head of occu- the instrument panel assembly by placing ma-
pants in the front and rear outer seating positions. terial over the steering pad and above the
dashboard, or by installing additional trim ma- 1 SRS air bag warning labels
j
They can help save lives and reduce serious inju-
ries. However, an inflating side air bag and curtain terial around the air bag system. The warning labels are located on the surface
air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Do not attach any objects to the steering of the sun visor.
Supplemental side air bags and curtain air bags do wheel pad or to the instrument panel. Objects 2 SRS front passenger air bag warning label
j
not provide restraint to the lower body. attached to the steering wheel pad and in-
strument panel may become dangerous pro- The warning label is located on the outer side
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the of the instrument panel (passenger side).
driver and passenger seated upright, and as far as jectiles and cause injury if the air bag inflates.
3 SRS side air bag warning label
is practical, away from the side air bag. Rear seat Work on and around the air bag system should j
passengers should be seated as far away as practi- be done by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work- The warning label is located on the side of the
cal from the door finishers and side roof rails. The shop. Installation of electrical equipment passenger side centre pillar.
side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in should be done by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
order to help protect the front occupants. Because fied workshop. The yellow SRS wiring har- Tags are also sewn into the front seat covers.
of this, the force of the side air bag and curtain air nesses* should not be modified or discon-
bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AIR BAG WARNING LABELS For more details on the installation of child restraints, After turning the ignition switch to the ON or
see also Child restraints later in this section. START position, the supplemental air bag warn-
Warning labels about the air bag system are placed ing light illuminates. The air bag warning light will
in the vehicle. Warning labels are for your safety and Side air bags:
turn off after approximately 7 seconds if the sys-
the safety of your passengers; do not remove them. Your vehicle is equipped with side air bags. You will tem is operational.
find a side air bag warning label attached to the
Child restraint on front passenger seat Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer or
vehicles interior as shown in the previous illustra-
NISSAN recommends that infants or small children tion. qualified workshop to have the air bag systems and
be seated in a child restraint system on the rear seat pre-tensioner seat belt serviced if the SRS air bag
This label warns you not to let infants or small chil- warning light:
if available. According to accident statistics, chil-
dren sit on the front passenger seat as the air bag
dren are safer when properly restrained in the rear Remains on after approximately 7 seconds
may cause serious injury in case of deployment dur-
seat rather than in the front seat.
Front passenger air bag:
ing a collision. Flashes intermittently

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger air


AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT Does not come on at all
bag, you will find an air bag warning label attached Under these conditions, the front air bags, side and
to the passenger side of the instrument panel as curtain air bags and/or pre-tensioner seat belt will
shown in the previous illustration. not operate properly. They must be checked and
repaired.
This label warns:
Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing
Repair and replacement procedure
child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags,
in front of it! and pre-tensioner seat belt system are designed to
activate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder,
This label warns NOT to fit a rearward facing child
NPA993 unless it is damaged, the air bag warning light will
restraint on the front passenger seat without first
remain illuminated after inflation has occurred. Re-
deactivating the front passenger air bag.
pair and replacement of the air bag system should
For instructions on deactivating the front passenger The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) air bag
be done only by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
air bag see Front passenger air bag deactivation warning light, displaying in the instrument
shop.
system later in this section. panel, monitors the circuits of the front air bag sys-
tem, the side and curtain air bag systems and the When maintenance work is required on the vehicle,
When installing child restraints in your vehicle, al- pre-tensioner seat belt system. The circuits moni- the air bag systems, related parts and pre-tensioner
ways carefully observe the manufacturers instruc- tored by the SRS air bag warning light are: all sen- seat belt should be pointed out to the person con-
tions. sors, air bag modules and all related wiring, and the
pre-tensioner seat belt.

1-16 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ducting the maintenance. The ignition switch should FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG front passenger air bag status. If the front passen-
always be in the LOCK position when working un- INDICATOR LIGHT ger air bag has been deactivated, the light comes on
der the bonnet or inside the vehicle. and stays on as long as the front passenger air bag
switch remains in the OFF position.
WARNING
Once the air bag has inflated or the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt has been activated, the air
bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt will
not function again and must be replaced. The
air bag module should be replaced by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. The air
bag module cannot be repaired.
NPA1043
All air bag systems should be inspected by a
NPA823Z
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop if there
is any damage to the front end portion of the WARNING
vehicle. A Intelligent Key equipped models
j
Since your vehicle is equipped with a front
When selling your vehicle, we request that you passenger air bag, it is not permitted to install B Integrated keyfob equipped models
j
inform the buyer about the air bag system and a rearward facing child restraint on the front
guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in passenger seat unless the front passenger air
Front passenger air bag deactivation
this Owners Manual. bag has been deactivated first. system
To fit a rear facing child restraint on the front pas-
If you need to dispose of an air bag or scrap Do not fit a rearward facing child seat on the
senger seat, you must deactivate the front passen-
the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer or quali- front passenger seat if the air bag activation/
fied workshop. Correct air bag disposal pro- deactivation system is malfunctioning. Your ger seat air bag system:
cedures are set forth in the appropriate vehicle must immediately be taken to a 1. With the ignition switch in the LOCK position
NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop in such and the engine off, open the front passenger
procedures could cause personal injury. a situation. door.
The front passenger air bag indicator light , 2. Insert the ignition key/emergency key (Intelligent
located in the combination meter, illuminates for ap- Key equipped models see Emergency/mechani-
proximately 7 seconds and then goes off. This
means the system is operational.
The front passenger air bag indicator light warns of

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHILD RESTRAINTS

cal key (Intelligent Key models) later in this sec- PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
tion) in the front passenger air bag switch on the WARNING
RESTRAINT USAGE
side of the dashboard, press then turn the key to If any of the following conditions occur after the
the OFF position. ignition switch has been turned to the ON posi-
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and tion, the front passenger air bag system needs
make sure the front passenger air bag indicator servicing and your vehicle must be taken to the
light remains illuminated. nearest NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

The indicator light remains continuously illumi- The front passenger air bag indicator light
nated to warn you of front passenger air bag status. comes on and remains illuminated after ap-
proximately 7 seconds while the front pas-
See Child restraints later in this section for child senger air bag switch is ON.
seat appropriate fitting.
The front passenger air bag indicator light SSS0099Z

Activating the front passenger air bag does not come on at all while the front pas-
You should reactivate the front passenger air bag senger air bag switch is ON. Infants and small children should always be placed
system as soon as the child restraint is not in use on Unless checked and repaired, the front passenger in an infant or child restraint while riding in the ve-
the front passenger seat to ensure protection of the air bag system may not function properly. hicle.
front passenger seat occupant in the event of an
impact. WARNING
To reactivate the front passenger air bag system: Infants and small children should never be
1. With the ignition switch in the LOCK position carried on your lap. It is not possible for even
and the engine off, open the front passenger the strongest adult to resist the forces of an
door. accident. The child could be crushed between
the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not
2. Insert the ignition key/emergency key (Intelligent put the same seat belt around a child and
Key equipped models) in the front passenger air yourself. In general, child restraints are de-
bag switch and turn the key to the ON position. signed to be installed with the lap portion of a
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and three-point type seat belt.
make sure the front passenger air bag indicator
light illuminates for a few seconds and then
NISSAN recommends installing the child re-
straint on the rear seat. According to accident
turns off. statistics, children are safer when properly re-
strained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

1-18 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


An improperly installed child restraint could Choose a child restraint appropriate to the the shoulder belt does not go in front of the
lead to serious injury in an accident. child and the vehicle. It may not be possible childs face or neck. If it does, put the shoul-
to properly install some types of child restraint der belt behind the child restraint.
Child restraints specially designed for infants and
in your vehicle.
small children are offered by several manufacturers. If the child restraint is equipped with a locking
When selecting any child restraint, keep the follow- Improper use of a child restraint can increase clip, ensure that the clip is securely fastened
ing points in mind: injuries to the infant or child and other occu- to the vehicle seat belt. If the locking clip is
pants in the vehicle. not used, injuries could result from the child
Choose a child restraint that complies with the
restraint tipping over during normal vehicle
latest European safety standard, ECE Regula- When your child restraint is not in use, keep it
braking or cornering.
tion 44.04. secured with a seat belt to prevent it from
being thrown forwards in case of a sudden
Place your child in the child restraint and check
stop or accident.
the various adjustments to be sure that the child
restraint is suitable for your child. Always follow Remember that a child restraint left in a closed
all of the recommended procedures. vehicle can become very hot. Check the seat-
ing surface and buckles before placing your
Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
child in the child restraint.
sure it is compatible with the vehicles seat belt
system. After attaching a child restraint, test the seat
before you place the child in it. Check that it
Refer to the tables further on in this section for a
does not tilt too far from side to side. Try to
list of the recommended fitment positions and
tug it forwards and check whether the belt
the approved child restraint for your vehicle.
holds it in place. If the restraint is not secure,
tighten the belt as necessary, or put the re-
WARNING straint in another seat and test it again.
Never install a rear facing child restraint in the
If the child restraint is not anchored properly,
front seat without first deactivating the front the risk of a child being injured in a collision
passenger air bag. or sudden stop greatly increases.
Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to
The front passenger seat should be
fit the child seat; however, the seatback positioned to fit the child seat appropriately.
should be as upright as possible. See Installation of a child restraint system on
Follow all of the child restraint manufacturers the front passenger seat later in this section.
instructions for installation and use.
For a front facing child restraint installed on a
three-point type lap/shoulder belt, make sure

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Approved child restraint positions
Seating position: 5-seater

Age group Front passenger seat with


deactivated front passenger Rear centre seat Rear outer seat
air bag ONLY
Group 0+ (< 13 kg) L* U* U* or I*
Group I (9 to 18 kg) L U U or I
Group II and III (15 to 36
L U U
kg)

U: Suitable for Universal category approved in this age group.

NOTE
Make sure the front passenger seat is adequately positioned. See Installation of a child restraint
system on the front passenger seat later in this section.
I: Suitable for ISOFIX (with top tether) category given in the following table.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints given in the following table. The restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted,
semi-universal or universal categories.
* Rearward facing ONLY

1-20 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Seating position: 7-seater
Front passenger seat
Age group with deactivated front
2nd row centre seat 2nd row outer seat 3rd row seat
passenger air bag
ONLY
Group 0+ (< 13 kg) L* L* L or I* X
Group I (9 to 18 kg) L L L or I L
Group II and III (15 to
L L L L
36 kg)

I: Suitable for ISOFIX (with top tether) category given in the following table.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints given in the following table. The restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted,
semi-universal or universal categories.
*: Rearward facing ONLY
X: Not suitable for child restraint for this age group

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


List of approved ISOFIX and specific Universal child restraints WARNING
Seating position: 5-seater Never install a rear facing child restraint sys-
Age group Front passenger seat with tem in the front seat without first deactivating
deactivated front passenger Rear centre seat Rear outer seat the front passenger air bag. Supplemental
air bag ONLY front-impact air bags inflate with great force.
Britax Cosy Tot Britax Cosy Tot A child restraint system could be struck by
Group 0+ (< 13 kg) Fair G 0/1 *1, *2
Romer Baby-Safe *1, *3 Romer Baby-Safe *1, *3 the supplemental front-impact air bag in an
Fair G 0/1 *3 Fair G 0/1 *3 accident and could seriously injure or kill your
Group I (9 to 18 kg) Fair G 0/1 *2
Britax/Romer Duo Plus *3 Britax/Romer Duo Plus *3 child.
Group II and III (15 to 36 Britax Hi Liner Britax Hi Liner Britax Hi Liner
kg) Romer Kid *3 Romer Kid *3 Romer Kid *3 Your vehicle is equipped with a side air bag
system: Do not let infants or small children sit
*1: Rearward facing only. in the front passenger seat as the air bag may
*2: This is an ISOFIX child restraint. It requires an additional platform to be fitted to your vehicle: cause serious injury in case of deployment
Rearward facing use Platform RWFA during a collision.
Forward facing use Platform FWFD
NOTE
Alternatively, refer to a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for the latest platform references.
*3: Universal mode only. Universal child restraints approved to ECE Regu-
lation No. 44.04 are clearly marked Universal.

1-22 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


INSTALLATION OF A CHILD
Seating position: 7-seater
RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE FRONT
Front passenger seat
PASSENGER SEAT
Age group with deactivated front
2nd row centre seat 2nd row outer seat 3rd row seat
passenger air bag
ONLY
Britax Cosy Tot Britax Cosy Tot
Group 0+ (< 13 kg) Romer Baby-Safe *1, Romer Baby-Safe *1, Fair G 0/1 *1, *2 X
*3 *3
Britax/Romer Duo Fair G 0/1 *2
Britax/Romer Duo Fair 123 Bimbo
Group I (9 to 18 kg) Plus *3 Maxi-Cosi Tobi
Plus *3 Maxi-Cosi Tobi
Fair 123 Bimbo Fair 123 Bimbo
Britax Hi Liner Britax Hi Liner
Group II and III (15 to Britax Hi Liner NPA679Z
Romer Kid *3 Romer Kid *3 Fair Junior
36 kg) Romer Kid *3 Front passenger air bag left active
Fair Junior Fair Junior

*1: Rearward facing only. WARNING


*2: This is an ISOFIX child restraint. It requires an additional platform to be fitted to your vehicle. Never install a rear facing child restraint sys-
Rearward facing use Platform RWF B/D tem in the front seat without first deactivating
Forward facing use Platform FWF B the front passenger air bag. Supplemental
Alternatively, refer to a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for the latest platform references. front-impact air bags inflate with great force.
*3: Universal mode only. A child restraint system could be struck by
X: Not suitable for child restraint for this age group the supplemental front-impact air bag in an
accident and could seriously injure or kill your
child.
NISSAN recommends that infants or small
children be seated in a child restraint system
in the rear seat. According to accident statis-
tics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat than in the front
seat.

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Rear facing 5. Route the seat belt tongue through the child re-
straint system and insert it into the buckle until
If you must install a child restraint system in the front you hear and feel the latch engage.
seat, follow these steps:
To prevent slack in the lap belt, secure the shoul-
1. Deactivate the front passenger air bag. See der belt in place with a locking clip j A . Use a
Front passenger air bag deactivation system locking clip attached to the child restraint sys-
earlier in this section for further details. tem, or one which is equivalent in dimensions
2. Move the seat to the rearmost position. and strength.
3. Adjust the head restraint to its highest position. Be sure to follow the child restraint system
SSS0374AZ
Remove it if it interferes with the child restraint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.
Rear outer seat (5-seater)
installation. In such situations, securely store the 6. Slide the seat forwards so that the seat belt fully
head restraint in the luggage compartment so tightens the child restraint system and the child
that it does not become a dangerous projectile restraint reaches the vehicle dashboard.
during a sudden stop or in an accident.
7. Test the child restraint system before you place
4. Position the child restraint system in the front the child in it. Check that it does not tilt too far
passenger seat. from side to side. Try to tug it forwards and check
Always follow the child restraint system manu- if it is held securely in place.
facturers instructions for installation and use.
INSTALLATION OF A CHILD
RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON REAR
SEATS NPA975

Rear seat (7-seater)


WARNING
Front-facing
NISSAN recommends that infants or small
When you install a front-facing child restraint system
children be seated in a child restraint system.
in a rear outer or centre seat, follow these steps:
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seat 1. 5-seater: Position the front passenger seat as
SSS0513Z than in the front seat. far forwards as possible.

The direction of the child restraint system de-


pends on the type of the child restraint sys-
tem and the size of the child.

1-24 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


sary to secure the shoulder belt in place with a
locking clip j A . Use a locking clip attached to
the child restraint system, or one which is equiva-
lent in dimensions and strength.
Be sure to follow the child restraint system
manufacturers instructions for belt routing.
4. Test the child restraint system before you place
the child in it. Check that it does not tilt too far
from side to side. Try to tug it forwards and check
NPA892Z NPA893Z
if it is held securely in place.
Rear centre seat (5-seater) Rear centre seat (5-seater)
5. Check to make sure that the child restraint sys-
2. Position the front-facing child restraint system on tem is properly secured prior to each use. 2. Position the rear-facing child restraint system on
the rear seat. the rear seat.
Always follow the child restraint system manu- Always follow the child restraint system manu-
facturers instructions for installation and use. factures instructions for installation and use.

SSS0375AZ

Rear outer seat (5-seater)

SSS0513Z
Rear-facing SSS0513Z
When you install a rear-facing child restraint system
in a rear outer or centre seat, follow these steps:
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child re- 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child re-
straint system and insert it into the buckle until 1. 5-seater: Slide the front passenger seat as far straint system and insert it into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage. backwards as possible. you hear and feel the latch engage.
To prevent slack in the lap belt, it will be neces- To prevent slack in the lap belt, it will be neces-

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


sary to secure the shoulder belt in place with a The rear seat is equipped with 2 ISOFIX com- CAUTION
locking clip j A . Use a locking clip attached to patible child restraint systems, on both outer
the child restraint system, or one which is equiva- seats ONLY. Do not secure a child restraint in The child restraint may also require the use of
a top tether strap. See Top tether strap for
lent in dimensions and strength. the rear centre seating position using the child
child restraint later in this section for instal-
restraint lower anchors. The child restraint will
Be sure to follow the child restraint system lation instructions. Alternatively, the child re-
not be secured properly.
manufacturers instructions for belt routing. straint may require an anti-rotation device
4. Test the child restraint system before you place The ISOFIX system anchors are designed to such as support leg. Refer to the child re-
withstand only those loads imposed by cor- straint system manufacturers instructions.
the child in it. Check that it does not tilt too far
rectly fitted child restraints. Under no circum-
from side to side. Try to tug it forwards and check
stances are they to be used for adult seat When installing a child restraint, carefully read
if it is held securely in place. and follow the instructions in this manual and
belts or harnesses.
those supplied with the child restraint.
5. Check to make sure that the child restraint sys-
Some child restraints include two rigid or webbing-
tem is properly secured prior to each use. When you install an ISOFIX system compatible child
mounted attachments that can be connected to two
restraint to the lower anchor attachments in the rear
ISOFIX SYSTEM (where fitted) anchors located at certain seating positions in your
seat, follow these steps:
vehicle. This system is known as the ISOFIX or
ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you 1. Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fin-
do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the gers into the lower anchor area and make sure
child restraint. Your vehicle is equipped with special there are no obstructions over the ISOFIX sys-
anchor points that are used with ISOFIX system tem anchors, such as seat belt webbing or seat
compatible child restraints on the rear seat. Check cushion material. The child restraint will not be
your child restraint for a label stating that it is com- secured properly if the ISOFIX system anchors
patible with the ISOFIX system. This information are obstructed.
may also be in the child restraint owners manual. If
2. To install the ISOFIX system compatible child
you have such a child restraint, refer to the illustra-
NPA983 restraint, insert the child restraint ISOFIX system
tion for the rear seating positions equipped with
anchor attachments into the anchor points on the
ISOFIX system anchors which can be used to se-
rear seat. See Top tether strap for child
cure the child restraint.
WARNING restraint later in this section for installation in-
The ISOFIX system anchors are located at the rear structions.
Attach ISOFIX compatible child restraint sys-
of the seat cushion near the seatback on the rear
tems only at the locations shown. If a child 3. Fit the ISOFIX funnel guides (supplied with the
seat. Labels are attached to the seat cushion to help
restraint is not secured properly, your child
you locate the ISOFIX system anchors (as illus-
could be seriously injured or killed in an acci-
trated).
dent.

1-26 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ISOFIX child seat where fitted) to the vehicle TOP TETHER STRAP FOR CHILD
ISOFIX brackets located in slots on the slope of WARNING
RESTRAINT
the rear outer seat cushions (refer to the ISOFIX Child restraint anchorages are designed to
label for appropriate locations). withstand only those loads imposed by cor-
4. After attaching the child restraint and before plac- rectly fitted child restraints. Under no circum-
ing the child in it, use force to check that it does stances are they to be used for adult seat
not tilt too far from side to side and tug it forward belts, harnesses or for attaching other items
to make sure that the child restraint is securely or equipment to the vehicle.
held in place. Make sure that both ISOFIX an- The child restraint top tether strap may be
chorages have latched correctly. damaged by contact with the rear parcel shelf
5. Make sure that the child restraint is properly se- or items in the luggage compartment area.
cured prior to each use. NPA921Z Remove the rear parcel shelf from the vehicle
or secure it in the luggage compartment area
NOTE see Rear parcel shelf (where fitted) later in
A Top tether clip
j this section. Also, secure any loose items in
For forward facing ISOFIX child restraint posi-
the luggage compartment. Your child could
tion on the rear seat, slide the front seat as far B Child restraint anchor bar
j
forwards as possible. be seriously injured or killed in a collision if
The top tether strap of the child restraint must be the top tether strap is damaged.
For rearward facing ISOFIX child restraint po- secured to the provided anchor point of your vehicle
sition on the rear seat, slide the front seat (see Anchor point locations (where fitted) later in
backwards until it touches the edge of the this section).
child restraint.
Installing top tether strap
1. Adjust the head restraint to the upper position.
2. Position the top tether strap over the top of the
seatback beneath the head restraint. Secure the
top tether hook to the tether anchor bracket that
provides the straightest installation. Tighten the
strap according to manufacturers instructions to
remove any slack.

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


straints top tether on the rear seat. If in doubt,
consult a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop.
Only the anchor points can be used for top
tether strap anchorage.
CAUTION
If you have any questions when installing a top
tether strap child restraint on the rear seat, con-
NPA920Z NPA1060 sult a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for
details.

NPA841Z NPA984

5-seater 7-seater

Anchor point locations (where fitted)


The anchor points are located under a cover on the
rear seatback (luggage compartment side).

WARNING
Refer to the child restraint manufacturers
manual for proper installation of the child re-

1-28 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


NOTE

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2 Instruments and controls

Meters and gauges .................................................. 2-2 Rear fog light ...................................................... 2-27
Speedometer...................................................... 2-2 Headlight aiming control .......................................... 2-27
Fuel gauge ......................................................... 2-2 Headlight aiming control switch (where fitted) ..... 2-27
Tachometer ........................................................ 2-2 Automatic aiming control (xenon headlights)........ 2-27
Engine coolant temperature gauge...................... 2-2 Headlight cleaner (where fitted) ............................... 2-28
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ........ 2-3 Hazard warning flasher switch ................................. 2-28
Checking bulbs .................................................. 2-3 Horn ........................................................................ 2-29
Warning lights .................................................... 2-3 Seat heating (where fitted) ....................................... 2-29
Indicator lights .................................................... 2-7 Power outlet ............................................................ 2-30
Audible reminders............................................... 2-9 Storage ................................................................... 2-31
Vehicle information display ....................................... 2-11 Storage trays ...................................................... 2-31
Warnings and alerts............................................ 2-12 Glove box ........................................................... 2-31
Odometer/twin trip odometer.............................. 2-16 Console box ....................................................... 2-32
Brightness control .............................................. 2-16 Cup holders ....................................................... 2-32
Trip computer ..................................................... 2-16 Bottle holder....................................................... 2-32
Settings menu .................................................... 2-18 Map pocket (where fitted) ................................... 2-32
Cruise control/Speed limiter indicator (where Seat pocket (where fitted)................................... 2-32
fitted).................................................................. 2-21 Roof rail (where fitted) ........................................ 2-32
Wiper and washer switch ........................................ 2-21 Rear parcel shelf (where fitted) ................................ 2-33
Windscreen........................................................ 2-22 Tonneau cover (where fitted).................................... 2-33
Rear window ...................................................... 2-23 Windows ................................................................. 2-34
Defogger switch ...................................................... 2-23 Power windows .................................................. 2-34
Rear window defogger ....................................... 2-23 C-View glass roof (where fitted) ............................ 2-36
Outside mirror defogger (where fitted) ................ 2-24 Sunshade operation............................................ 2-36
Headlight and turn signal switch............................... 2-24 System reinitialisation.......................................... 2-37
Xenon headlights (where fitted)........................... 2-24 Interior lights............................................................ 2-37
Headlight switch ................................................. 2-24 Front Room light ................................................. 2-37
Turn signal switch............................................... 2-26 Map lights (where fitted) ..................................... 2-38
Fog light switch ....................................................... 2-26 Rear room/reading light ...................................... 2-38
Front fog light (where fitted)................................ 2-26 Luggage compartment light ................................ 2-38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Vanity mirror light (where fitted)........................... 2-38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


METERS AND GAUGES

NOTE mation display and the Low fuel indicator light ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
comes on in the combination meter when the GAUGE
For an overview see Instrument and control
fuel level is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is
layout in the 0. Illustrated table of contents The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-
convenient. There should be a small reserve of
section and see Meters and gauges in the 0. Il- ture. The engine coolant temperature should remain
fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle
lustrated table of contents section. within the normal range j2.
reaches the empty level.
SPEEDOMETER CAUTION The engine coolant temperature varies with the out-
side air temperature and driving conditions.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers
empty. CAUTION

TACHOMETER If the gauge exceeds the normal range, stop as


soon as safely possible. If the engine is over-
heated, continued operation of the vehicle may
seriously damage the engine see Engine
overheat in the 6. In case of emergency sec-
tion for immediate action.
NIC1561
WARNING

The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed (km/h Allow the engine to cool down before removing
or MPH). Scale resolution on the meter varies with the radiator cap to avoid the danger of being
models. NIC1563 scalded.

FUEL GAUGE
The tachometer indicates the engine speed in revo-
The fuel gauge is active when the ignition switch is lutions per minute (r/min). Do not rev the engine
in the ON position. into the red zone j1.
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turn-
Scale resolution on the meter varies with models.
ing, acceleration, or when going up or downhill.
CAUTION
The c symbol indicates that the fuel filler lid is
located on the right side of the vehicle. When the engine speed approaches the red zone,
shift to a higher gear. Operating the engine in the
NOTE red zone may cause serious engine damage.
A low fuel warning comes on in the vehicle infor-

2-2 Instruments and controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning Seat belt (driver and front passenger) warn-
Low fuel indicator light (orange)
light (orange) ing light (red)
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) air
Brake warning light (red) Slip indicator light (orange)
bag warning light (red)

Charge warning light (red) Water in fuel filter warning light (orange) Front fog light indicator light (green)

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) warning light


4WD warning light (orange) Rear fog light indicator light (orange)
(orange)
Electronic Power Assisted Steering (EPAS) Automatic Transmission check indicator light
High beam indicator light (blue)
warning light (red) (AT models) (orange)
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
Engine oil pressure/level warning light (red) Dipped beam indicator light (green)
indicator light (orange)
Front passenger air bag deactivated (OFF) Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) OFF Side light and headlight indicator light
warning light (red) indicator light (orange) (green)
Malfunction warning light (red)
4WD mode indicator light (AUTO) (green) SPORT mode indicator light
Malfunction Indicator light (orange)

Master warning light (orange) 4WD mode indicator light (LOCK) (orange) Trailer direction indicator light (green)
Glow plug indicator light (Diesel engine)
NATS security warning light (red) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights (green)
(orange)

CHECKING BULBS , , , , , , , WARNING LIGHTS


With all doors closed, apply the handbrake, fasten , , , ,( M9R engine Also see Vehicle information display later in this
the seat belts and turn the ignition switch to the ON only) section.
position without starting the engine. The following If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned-
lights (where fitted) will come on: out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
Have the system checked, and repaired promptly by warning light
, , , , ,
a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. After turning the ignition switch to the ON position,
The following lights (where fitted) come on briefly the light will illuminate. The anti-lock braking system
and then go off: warning light will turn off after approximately 2 sec-
onds if the system is operational.

Instruments and controls 2-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


If the light comes on while the engine is running, it
WARNING
If the vehicle continues to be driven at a low
may indicate that the anti-lock portion of the braking speed with the DPF warning light illuminated,
system is not functioning properly. Have the system Driving your vehicle could be dangerous. Have the fail-safe will limit engine revolutions and/
checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. it towed to the nearest NISSAN dealer or quali- or torque. In this case, the engine oil must be
fied workshop. replaced and the process of burning accumu-
Brake warning light lated particulate matter must be carried out
Depressing the brake pedal with the engine by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
This light functions for both the handbrake and the stopped could increase your stopping dis- Service regeneration is a maintenance item
footbrake systems. tance and require greater pedal travel dis- and is not covered by the NISSAN warranty.
tance and effort.
Handbrake indicator:
Charge warning light
Use engine oil for DPF equipped models. For
The light comes on when the handbrake is applied. details, see Capacities and recommended
Low brake fluid warning: fuel/lubricants in the 9. Technical
If the light comes on while the engine is running, it information section.
The light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light may indicate that the charging system is not func-
comes on while the engine is running with the hand- tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the CAUTION
brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing The DPF becomes extremely hot after burning
following procedure: or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN dealer or particulate matter.
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as qualified workshop immediately.
M9R engine only:
necessary. See Brake and clutch fluid in the CAUTION
8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
Do not continue driving if the alternator belt is tion, the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) warning light
loose, broken or missing. illuminates for a few seconds and then goes out.
WARNING
This indicates that the system is operational.
If the level is below the MIN (minimum) mark
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until warning light (where fitted) All diesel engines:
the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN GREEN PROGRAM
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. WARNING
Some diesel engine models are fitted with a Diesel
2. If the brake fluid level is correct: Be careful not to burn yourself with exhaust Particulate Filter (DPF), which is a device that re-
gases. moves carbon (soot) from the exhaust gas. To oper-
Have the warning system checked by a NISSAN
Do not park the vehicle over flammable mate- ate effectively, the DPF system must routinely con-
dealer or qualified workshop.
rials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags, duct a cleaning operation, called regeneration, that
as they may burn easily.

2-4 Instruments and controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


burns-off the accumulated carbon. This regenera- Electronic Power Assisted Engine oil pressure warning light
tion process is normally automatic and not visible to Steering (EPAS) warning light
the driver. This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi- light flickers or comes on during normal driving, or
Regeneration restrictions: tion, the EPAS warning light illuminates. This means stays on once the engine is started, pull off the road
Driving conditions such as frequent short journeys the system is operational. at a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call
or stop/start driving can result in excessive build up a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
If the warning light remains illuminated after the en-
of carbon in the filter. When this happens the DPF
gine has been started, there will be no power steer- CAUTION
warning light will illuminate (and a message will ap-
ing assistance: the vehicle may be driven using the
pear in the vehicle information display, see Vehicle Running the engine with the engine oil pressure
mechanical steering system although it is not rec-
information display later in this section) to inform warning light on could cause serious damage to
ommended as the effort required to turn the steer-
you that the vehicle must be driven in a particular the engine.
ing wheel will be significantly increased compared
manner to begin regeneration.
to normal operation.
NOTE
When the DPF warning light is illuminated, provided
that legal and safety conditions allow, the vehicle WARNING The [il lvl lw] message indication is dis-
should be driven at a speed of over 60 km/h (37.5 played for 5 seconds after the ignition switch has
MPH) until the DPF warning light turns off. This pro- If the EPAS warning light illuminates while been turned to the ON position. See Vehicle in-
cess can take up to 30 minutes to complete. driving, stop as soon as safely possible. formation display later in this section.
If regeneration fails: In certain circumstances, factors external to
Front passenger air bag
the EPAS system may contribute to the illumi-
Failure to react to the DPF warning light may lead to nation of the warning light. If the warning light deactivated (OFF) warning light
saturation of the DPF system. If this happens the illuminates, stop the vehicle as soon as safely When the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
Malfunction Indicator (MI) will illuminate indi- possible if driving, turn the ignition switch to tion the front passenger air bag deactivated (OFF)
cating that a Service Regeneration by a NISSAN the OFF position for approximately 20 sec- warning light , located in the combination
dealer or qualified workshop is required. The engine onds and then turn the ignition switch to the meter, illuminates for approximately 7 seconds and
speed may also be limited to 3,000 rpm to protect ON position again. If the light remains illumi- then goes off. This means the system is operational.
the DPF system. nated, we recommend that you contact a
The light warns of front passenger air bag status. If
NOTE NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
the front passenger air bag has been deactivated,
Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop See Power steering system in the 5. Starting and the light comes on and stays on as long as the front
to perform a forced regeneration. driving section for further details on the EPAS sys- passenger air bag switch remains in the OFF posi-
tem. tion.

Instruments and controls 2-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Malfunction warning light (red) NATS security warning light need servicing and the vehicle must be taken to the
(where fitted) (where fitted) nearest NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop if the
SRS air bag warning light:
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi- This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in
tion, the malfunction warning light illuminates. This the LOCK, OFF or Acc position. This function Remains on after approximately 7 seconds
means the system is operational. indicates that your vehicle is equipped with the Flashes intermittently
NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)*.
See Malfunction Indicator light later in this section Does not come on at all
for details of the orange Malfunction Indicator light. If NATS is malfunctioning, this light will remain on
while the ignition switch is in the ON position. Unless checked and repaired, the SRS air bag sys-
If the red malfunction warning light comes on steady tem and pre-tensioner seat belts may not function
while the engine is running, it may indicate an en- For additional information, see Security system properly.
gine control system malfunction. later in this section.
For additional details see Air bag warning light in
Have your vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer or * Immobilizer the 1. Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental
qualified workshop. You do not need to have your restraint system section.
vehicle towed to the dealer. Seat belt (driver and front
passenger) warning light 4WD warning light (4WD
CAUTION
The seat belt warning light alerts the driver if their models)
Continued vehicle operation without having the seat belt or that of the front passenger is not se- The 4WD warning light comes on when the ignition
engine control system checked and repaired as curely fastened. The light will come on when the switch is turned to the ON position. It turns off soon
necessary could lead to poor driveability, ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It will go after the engine is started.
reduced fuel economy and possible damage to out when both the driver and front passenger (if
the engine control system, which may affect your occupied) seat belts have been securely fastened. If the 4WD system malfunctions or the revolution or
warranty coverage. radius of the front and the rear wheels differs, the
A seat belt reminder chime is also fitted, see Seat warning light will either remain illuminated or blink.
Incorrect setting of the engine control system may belt reminder chime later in this section. See Four-wheel Drive (4WD) (where fitted) in the
lead to non-compliance of local and national emis-
5. Starting and driving section.
sion laws and regulations. Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) air bag warning light CAUTION
Master warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START If the warning light comes on or blinks while
The master warning light is displayed when any position, the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) driving, 4WD mode will change to 2WD mode.
warning message is displayed. See Vehicle infor- air bag warning light will illuminate. The SRS air bag Reduce the vehicle speed and have your ve-
mation display later in this section. warning light will turn off after approximately 7 sec- hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
onds if the system is operational. workshop as soon as possible.
The air bag systems and pre-tensioner seat belts

2-6 Instruments and controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Do not drive on dry, hard surfaced roads in CAUTION Continuously Variable
the LOCK position. Transmission (CVT) indicator
Failure to drain the water from the fuel filter can
If the 4WD warning light blinks in the follow- cause serious damage to the engine. Contact a light (CVT models)
ing sequence while driving, proceed as in- NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop as soon as
This light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned
structed: possible.
to the ON position.
Blinks rapidly (about twice a second) INDICATOR LIGHTS If the CVT light comes on during normal operation,
Pull off the road at a safe place and idle Automatic transmission check it may indicate that something is wrong with the
the engine. The driving mode will change indicator light (AT models) Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). Have
to 2WD to prevent the 4WD system from your system checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
malfunctioning. The vehicle can be driven This light indicates both the Automatic transmis- fied workshop.
again as soon as the warning light turns sion oil temperature warning and the Fail-safe op-
off. eration. NOTE

Blinks slowly (about once every 2 seconds) Automatic transmission oil temperature A CVT ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM WARN-
warning: ING display (centre console where fitted) will
Change the driving mode to 2WD and re- come on when a malfunction may have occurred
duce the vehicle speed as soon as safely This light comes on when the automatic transmis-
to the transmission control system. The selected
possible. sion oil temperature is too high. If the light comes on
Detailed Information key will then recommend
while driving, reduce the vehicle speed as soon as
If the warning light is still on after performing the going to a NISSAN dealer for the system to be
safely possible until the light turns off.
above operation, have the system checked by a checked.
Fail-safe operation:
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop as soon as Electronic Stability Program
possible. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the light
comes on for 2 seconds. If the light blinks, it may
(ESP) OFF indicator light
Water in fuel filter warning light indicate the automatic transmission is not function- (where fitted)
(where fitted) ing properly. Have your NISSAN dealer or qualified The light comes on when the Electronic Stability
If the warning light remains on or flashes irregularly workshop check and repair the transmission. Programme (ESP) OFF switch is pushed to the OFF
while the engine is running, there may be water in CAUTION position. This indicates that the ESP system is not
the fuel filter. Should this happen, try to drain the operating.
water from the fuel filter, see Fuel filter (Diesel en- Continued vehicle operation when the automatic
transmission check warning light is on may dam- This light also comes on briefly when the ignition
gine models) in the 8. Maintenance and switch is turned to the ON position. The light will
do-it-yourself section. age the automatic transmission.
turn off after approximately 1 second if the ESP sys-
tem is operational.

Instruments and controls 2-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


When the ESP OFF indicator light and SLIP indica- Glow plug indicator light (Diesel On steady (orange):
tor light come on with the ESP system turned on, it engines) An engine malfunction has been detected. Have the
alerts the driver to the fact that the systems fail-safe vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
mode is operating. This means that the system may This light comes on when the ignition switch is in the
workshop. You do not need to have your vehicle
not be functioning properly. Have the system ON position and goes out when the glow plugs have
towed to the dealer.
checked by your NISSAN dealer or qualified work- been pre-heated. When the engine is cold, the glow
shop. plug warm-up time will be longer. Blinking (orange) (where fitted):

If an abnormality occurs in the system, the ESP sys- Low fuel indicator light An engine misfire has been detected which may
tem function will be cancelled, but the vehicle is still damage the engine control system.
driveable. For additional information, see Electronic When the fuel level is getting low, the low fuel warn- To reduce or avoid engine control system dam-
Stability Programme (ESP) system (where fitted) in ing light will switch on to alert the driver. Refuel as age:
the 5. Starting and driving section. soon as it is convenient. There should be a small
reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge Do not drive at speeds above 70 km/h (43
4WD mode indicator light reaches the empty level. See also Vehicle informa- MPH).
(AUTO) (4WD models) tion display later in this section. Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
This light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned
to the ON position. If the engine is running, this light
Malfunction Indicator light Avoid steep uphill grades.
will illuminate when the 4WD AUTO mode is se- When the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi- If possible, reduce the load being carried or
lected. towed.
tion, the orange Malfunction Indicator light illumi-
See Four-wheel Drive (4WD) (where fitted) in the nates. This means that the system is operational. The Malfunction Indicator light may stop blinking
5. Starting and driving section. and come on steady.
If the orange Malfunction Indicator light comes on
4WD mode indicator light steady or blinks (where fitted) while the engine is Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer or
running, it may indicate an engine control system qualified workshop. You do not need to have your
(LOCK) (4WD models)
malfunction. vehicle towed to the dealer.
This light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned
See Malfunction warning light (red) (where fitted) CAUTION
to the ON position.
earlier in this section for details of the red malfunc-
Continued vehicle operation without having the
If the engine is running, this light and the 4WD mode tion warning light (where fitted).
engine control system checked and repaired as
indicator light (AUTO) will be lit when the 4WD
necessary could lead to poor driveability,
LOCK mode is selected.
reduced fuel economy and possible damage to
See Four-wheel Drive (4WD) (where fitted) in the the engine control system, which may affect your
5. Starting and driving section. warranty coverage.

2-8 Instruments and controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SLIP indicator light Side light and headlight indicator AUDIBLE REMINDERS
(where fitted) light Door open reminder chime
The SLIP indicator blinks when the Electronic Sta- This light comes on when the side light or headlight
The chime will sound if any door other than the driv-
bility Programme (ESP) system is operating, thus position is selected. See Headlight and turn signal
ers door is left open and the power door lock switch
alerting the driver to the fact that the road surface is switch later in this section for further details.
is held down.
slippery and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.
SPORT mode indicator light Intelligent Key models: The external buzzer will
You may feel or hear the system working, this is nor- (where fitted) sound if the vehicle is being locked remotely or us-
mal.
The SPORT mode indicator light illuminates when ing an outside door lock switch and any door is
The light will continue to blink for a few seconds the SPORT mode is turned ON. See SPORT mode open.
after the ESP system stops limiting wheel spin. switch in the 5. Starting and driving section for Handbrake reminder buzzer
Front fog light indicator light the use of the SPORT mode switch.
A buzzer will sound when driving away if the hand-
(where fitted) Trailer direction indicator light brake has not been released.
The light comes on when the front fog lights are Light reminder chime
switched on. The light will light up whenever an additional electri-
cal load is detected by the direction indicator sys- A chime will sound for 10 seconds if the drivers
Rear fog light indicator light tem. door is opened while the external lights are turned
For additional information, see Trailer towing in on and the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK
The light comes on when the rear fog light is position.
the 5. Starting and driving section.
switched on.
See Headlight and turn signal switch later in this
High beam indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator
section for further details on the headlight operation.
lights
This light comes on when the headlight high beam The direction indicator lights will flash when the turn
Fog light reminder chime
is on and goes out when the low beam is selected. signal switch or hazard warning flasher switch is A chime will sound if the ignition switch is in the
turned on. See Headlight and turn signal switch OFF or LOCK position and the headlight switch is
Dipped beam indicator light later in this sectionand see Hazard warning flasher in the AUTO position (where fitted) and the fog lights
switch later in this section for further details. are left on.
This light comes on when the switch is turned to the
position: The headlights will come on and front See Headlight and turn signal switch later in this
side, tail, number plate and instrument lights remain section for further details.
on.

Instruments and controls 2-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Seat belt reminder chime
A chime will sound for approximately 90 seconds if
the vehicles speed exceeds 15 km/h (9 MPH) and
the drivers seat belt or front passengers seat belt,
if occupied is not securely fastened. See Ignition
knob warning (Intelligent Key models) later in this
section.
Key reminder buzzer (Intelligent Key
models)
The external buzzer will beep 3 times if:
The Intelligent Key is removed from the vehicle
while the ignition is not in the LOCK position.
The vehicle is being locked remotely or using an
outside door lock switch and the Intelligent Key
has been left inside the vehicle.
Park reminder chime (AT or CVT
models)
A chime will sound if the ignition switch is turned to
LOCK and the gear selector lever is not in the P
(Park) position.

2-10 Instruments and controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

6 Gear shift indicator (where fitted), see


j
(P. 5-16)
Stop/Start system indicator (where fitted), see
(P. 5-21)
7
j switch/shaft (Settings control and trip
computer control)
8
j switch/shaft (Twin trip odometer control
and brightness level control)

WARNING
Operating the vehicle information display
while driving can lead to a crash resulting in
serious injuries or death. Always park the ve-
hicle in a safe place before operating the dis-
play screen.
Look at the display screen only briefly while
driving. Keep your eyes on the road. Inatten-
tive driving may lead to a crash resulting in
serious injuries or death.

NIC1645

1 Outside temperature (P. 2-19)


j Speed limiter (P. 5-31)
2 Clock (P. 2-19)
j Settings menu (P. 2-18)
3 Warnings and alerts (P. 2-12)
j Intelligent Key operation (P. 2-6)
Trip computer (P. 2-16) 4 Odometer (P. 2-16)
j
Engine oil level information (P. 2-15) 5 Twin trip odometer (P. 2-16)
j
Cruise control (P. 5-29)

Instruments and controls 2-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


WARNINGS AND ALERTS
The design of the warnings and alerts may differ
depending on the model.
1 Door open warning
j
This warning appears if any of the doors are open or
not closed securely. The vehicle icon indicates
which door is open on the display.
2 Back door open warning
j
This warning appears if the back door is open or not
closed securely. When the door is to be left open,
e.g. when you transport a long load, push the
switch or the steering wheel switch j i (where fit-
ted) to confirm.
j3 Seat belt warning (Rear seat or 2nd
row)
The seat belt warning indicates the seating position
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and disappears when:
All related seat belts have been securely fas-
tened.
The switch or the steering wheel switch j
i
(where fitted) is pushed.
Approximately 35 seconds after engine start.

WARNING
Seat belts for 3rd row seats (where fitted) are not
NIC1644
part of the seat belt warning light monitoring sys-
tem.

2-12 Instruments and controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


For more information, see Seat belts in the The emergency key can only be removed at 8 Intelligent Key detection warning
j
1. Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental the LOCK position. Make sure the ignition
restraint system section knob is in the LOCK position before removing If the Intelligent Key is taken outside of the vehicle
the emergency key. ID recognition zone while the ignition knob is in the
4 Ignition knob warning (Intelligent Key
j Acc or ON position, the Intelligent Key detection
models) See Steering lock in the 5. Starting and driving warning will be displayed and a buzzer will sound.
section for further details. The Intelligent Key detection warning disappears
The warning appears when the ignition knob is left when the Intelligent Key is placed back in the pas-
in the Acc or OFF position instead of completely 5 Steering wheel lock warning
j senger compartment.
being turned to the LOCK position. The warning appears when the ignition knob is
The message also appears when you try to start the
If this warning appears, turn the ignition knob to the pressed, but not turned to the Acc or OFF posi-
vehicle if the Intelligent Key is not detected within
LOCK position. tion within a short period. Move the steering wheel
the vehicle.
to release the lock and turn the ignition knob to Acc
When the ignition knob is in the ON position, a or ON. The warning will turn off in approximately 5 For more information, see Integrated keyfob/re-
buzzer will sound twice and the ignition knob warn- seconds. mote control system in the 3. Pre-driving checks
ing shows when the ignition knob is turned to the and adjustments section.
Acc or OFF position. This is to warn the driver that See Steering lock in the 5. Starting and driving
the ignition knob is not in the LOCK position. section for further details. 9 Intelligent Key low battery warning
j
MT models: 6 Brake/Clutch warning (where fitted)
j The Intelligent Key low battery warning may show if
Depress the ignition PUSH release button and turn a low battery voltage is detected when the ignition
When starting your vehicle, it is necessary to oper-
the ignition knob to the LOCK position. knob is turned from OFF to the ON position.
ate the brake (CVT and AT models) or clutch pedal
AT or CVT models: (MT models). For more information, see Integrated keyfob/Intel-
ligent Key battery replacement in the 8. Mainte-
Make sure the gear selector lever is in the P (Park) For more information, see Starting the engine in
nance and do-it-yourself section.
position and then turn the ignition switch to the the 5. Starting and driving section.
LOCK position. 7 Handbrake reminder
j 10 Intelligent Key system fault warning
j
See Ignition knob (where fitted) in the 5. Starting CAUTION
The reminder will come on if the handbrake is on
and driving section for further details. whilst the vehicle is being driven. If the Intelligent Key system fault warning comes
CAUTION on, it may indicate a system malfunction. We rec-
A buzzer will also sound.
ommend that you contact a NISSAN dealer or
The steering wheel can only be locked when qualified workshop for repair.
the ignition knob is in the LOCK position. Make
sure the ignition knob is in the LOCK position
before leaving the vehicle.

Instruments and controls 2-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


For more information, see Integrated keyfob/re- CAUTION 17 Diesel Particulate Filter warning
j
mote control system in the 3. Pre-driving checks (where fitted)
The engine oil level check is not designed to indi-
and adjustments section.
cate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the See Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) (where fitted)
11 Intelligent Key convenience mode alert
j oil level. in the 5. Starting and driving section for further
See Engine oil in the 8. Maintenance and details.
The Intelligent Key convenience mode alert shows
to confirm that convenience mode has been acti- do-it-yourself section. 18 Setting menu operation alert
j
vated. See Switching from Convenience mode to
Anti-hijack mode in the 3. Pre-driving checks and 14 Engine oil level
j The alert shows when you try to operate the setting
menu while driving. The setting menu can only be
adjustments section. This display provides a visual representation of the
entered if the vehicle is stationary.
engine oil level.
12 Intelligent Key antihijack alert
j
15 Engine oil level low
j 19 Maintenance due alert (where fitted)
j
The Intelligent Key antihijack alert shows to con-
This alert shows that maintenance is due. The mes-
firm that anti-hijack mode has been activated. See If the oil level is not sufficient for driving, the [Oil
sage is shown until the steering wheel switch j i
Switching from Convenience mode to Anti-hijack level low] message appears. Oil needs to be added
before driving. (where fitted) is pressed. When the maintenance
mode in the 3. Pre-driving checks and
due alert reaches 0 km (miles), the symbol
adjustments section.
CAUTION flashes next to the odometer value.
13 Engine oil level information
j The engine oil level should be checked regularly. CAUTION
When turning the ignition to the ON position, the oil Operating with an insufficient amount of oil can
damage the engine and such damage is not cov- The engine oil must be changed before the main-
message indicates the oil level.
ered by the warranty. tenance due alert is shown.
The [Oil level OK] message indicates the oil level is
Park the vehicle at a safe location as soon as pos- Failure to do so risks causing damage to the
sufficient for driving. Push the switch or the
sible and fill the engine with the recommended en- engine.
steering wheel switch j i (where fitted) when the
[Oil level OK] message shows to see a more de- gine oil. Continued driving after maintenance due alert
tailed oil level. (See Oil level j
14 )
For checking the engine oil level and adding oil, see reaches 0 km (miles) may result in reduced
Engine oil in the 8. Maintenance and engine performance. The engine malfunction
NOTE indicator light (orange) will illuminate.
do-it-yourself section.
The [Oil level OK] message indication is dis- The DPF (where fitted) may also become satu-
played after the ignition switch has been turned 16 Engine oil sensor warning
j rated because regeneration is restricted once
to the ON position and other warnings have been Please visit your local NISSAN dealer or qualified the distance equals 0 km (miles)
shown. workshop if this warning appears.
Always visit a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop to perform the maintenance and the reset.

2-14 Instruments and controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


However reset is possible (only after the oil was 23 Low temperature warning
j Stop/Start System (where fitted)
changed) using the [Service] menu item in the
If, during driving, the temperature falls below 4C For more information, see Stop/Start System
[Settings] menu. See [Maintenance] later in this
this alert will appear to indicate low outside air tem- (where fitted) in the 5. Starting and driving sec-
section
perature. You can switch the low temperature warn- tion
Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer ing [On] or [Off]. See [Units] later in this section
or qualified workshop if these conditions occur. 26 Engine stop:
j
CAUTION
If the engine stops when the Stop/Start System is
20 Distance to maintenance alert
j Even if the alert is not on, there is no guarantee activated, the message is shown.
(where fitted) that the road is free of hazards caused by in-
27 Auto start deactivation:
j
This alert reminds when maintenance is due in the clement weather.
shown distance. The alert is shown for 10 seconds If the engine stops when the Stop/Start System is
at ignition ON, when the distance to the next main- NOTE activated, and will not start automatically, the mes-
tenance interval is below 5000 km (3100 Miles). The outside air temperature sensor is located at sage is shown.
The message is shown until the steering wheel the front of the vehicle. At low speeds the sensor
28 System fault:
j
switch j i (where fitted) is pressed. can be affected by engine heat, heat reflected
from the road surface and exhaust from other If the Stop/Start System is activated, but does not
NOTE operate correctly, the message is shown. Visit a
vehicles, these influences can cause the display
Visit a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop to be inaccurate. To compensate, the outside air NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
before the maintenance due alert j19 reaches temperature display is designed to react slowly Activating or deactivating using the Stop/Start
0 km (miles) to perform maintenance (oil to increasing temperatures, but quickly to falling System OFF switch:
change). temperatures.
Using the Stop/Start System OFF switch activates
The maintenance interval will reduce faster
24 Low fuel warning
j or deactivates the Stop/Start System. This is shown
with certain types of driving, especially at low
in the vehicle information display:
speeds in urban conditions. This warning appears when the fuel level in the tank
is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, 29 : The Stop/Start System OFF switch is
j
21 Tyre change alert
j preferably before the fuel gauge reaches the empty pushed to the ON position.
You can set a distance for changing tyres. See position. For more information, see Fuel gauge
30 : The Stop/Start System OFF switch is pushed to
j
[Maintenance] later in this section earlier in this section. the OFF position.
22 Maintenance alert
j 25 Driver alert
j
You can set a distance for a non specific mainte- This warning appears when the previously set time
nance item. See [Maintenance] later in this sec- for a break is reached. You can set the time for up
tion to 6 hours in the setting menu. (See Settings menu
later in this section.)

Instruments and controls 2-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ODOMETER/TWIN TRIP ODOMETER BRIGHTNESS CONTROL The trip computer is controlled using the switch
or the steering wheel switch j i (where fitted).
Rotate the switch j
C anticlockwise to brighten
or clockwise to dim the instrument lighting level. The trip computer contains the following items:

NOTE [Fuel Economy] [Average speed] [Driving dis-


tance] [Elapsed time] [Range] (km or MILES)
Brightness cannot be set when the headlight [Settings][ CO2 Saved] (where fitted) [Fuel
switch is in the OFF position. Economy]
TRIP COMPUTER Short press to change the information that is
being displayed.
NIC1542
Push and hold (up until 3 seconds) resets the
current item that is displayed (except [Settings]
The odometer and twin trip odometer are displayed and [Range]).
when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Push and hold over 3 seconds performs a global
reset. This resets all functions of the display (ex-
Odometer cept [Range] and Trip A).
The odometer j A records the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven. 1 Fuel Economy (l (litre)/100 km or
j
MPG)
Twin trip odometer
The [Fuel Economy] mode shows the current fuel
The twin trip odometer j
B records the distance of 2 consumption in a moving bar graph.
individual trips (Trip A and Trip B).
The average fuel consumption mode displays the
Changing the display: average fuel consumption since the last reset.
Briefly press the switch j
C to change the dis- It is shown in 2 ways:
play as follows.
Trip A Trip B Trip A
The symbol (average) with the value on the
top right of the bar.
Resetting the trip odometer:
By the position of the icon (diamond) inside
Press and hold the switch for approximately 1 the bar.
second to reset the selected trip (Trip A or Trip B).
NIC1650

2-16 Instruments and controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2 Average speed
j For more information, see Settings menu later in
this section.
The [Average speed] mode shows the average ve-
hicle speed since the last reset. 7 CO2 saved (where fitted)
j
3 Driving distance
j Estimated quantity of CO2 exhaust emissions pre-
vented by Stop/Start System shown every time the
The [Driving distance] mode shows the distance engine is automatically stopped.
driven since the last reset.
For more information, see Stop/Start System
4 Elapsed time
j (where fitted) in the 5. Starting and driving sec-
The [Elapsed Time] mode shows the time since the tion
last reset.
5 Range (km or MILES)
j
The [Range] mode provides you with an estimation
of the distance that can be driven before refuelling
(distance to empty). The range is constantly being
calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the fuel
tank and the actual fuel consumption.
When the fuel level gets close to empty, the range
will change to ----.
If the amount of fuel added is small, the display
just before the ignition switch is turned to the
OFF position may continue to be displayed.
When driving uphill or corners, the fuel in the
tank shifts, this may momentarily change the dis-
play.
6 Settings
j
The [Settings] item is only displayed when using the
switch to control the trip computer.
Rotate the switch to enter the [Settings] menu

Instruments and controls 2-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


A Petrol models
j
B Diesel models
j
SETTINGS MENU
Select the [Settings] menu in the trip computer then
rotate the switch to enter the Settings menu.
Use the switch to select and set the items.
NOTE
Settings cannot be changed while driving.

NIC1708

2-18 Instruments and controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


To return to the previous screen of the setting mode,
select [Back].
[Units]
The following items can be set to your preference.
[Temperature]
Select this submenu to choose from degrees
Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) on the display.
[Dist./Ful]
The fuel consumption units can be set too.
Select this submenu to choose:
distance in miles, fuel consumption in MPG
distance in km, fuel consumption in km/l
distance in km, fuel consumption in l/100km
To return to the previous screen of the setting mode,
select [Back].
[Alarms]
Alerts can be set to notify the following items.
NIC1647
[Driver Alert]

[On] or [Off] Select this submenu to set the [Driver Alert] pe-
[Clock]
riod.
Clock adjustment can be set to: Select this submenu to set the clock display On
or Off. [Outside temp]
[Set Clock]
Select this submenu to set the low temperature
Adjust the time (hour and minute) of the clock on
[24/12 r]
alert [On] or [Off].
the meter by rotating the switch. Select this submenu to set the 12h/24h time dis-
play mode. To return to the top page of the setting mode, select
Push the switch to set the values [Back].

Instruments and controls 2-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[Stop/Start] (where fitted) [Maintenance] 3) Select [Confirm] to confirm the reset of the
distance driven information to zero.
The CO2 savings and the engine stop time using The maintenance intervals of the following remind-
the Stop/Start System are kept in a submenu. ers can be set or reset: For Diesel models j
B:

[Trip Saving] [Service] for engine oil change service reminder 1) Select [Service].
View the estimated CO2 exhaust emissions pre- Select this submenu to view, or reset the dis- 2) Press the switch for more than 2 sec-
vented since last reset. tance driven information or to set an interval onds, then release.
(petrol models). 3) Select [Reset].
It is possible to reset using the [Reset CO2]
submenu then push the switch to set to zero. View the distance driven information: 4) Select [Confirm] to confirm the reset proce-
NOTE Select [Service]. dure.

The [Trip Saving] value is the same informa- Set procedure (petrol models only j
A ): Alternatively while the oil service message is
tion that is displayed when the engine is auto- displayed (where fitted):
1) Select [Service].
matically stopped by the Stop/Start System. After changing the engine oil: Turn the igni-
2) Select the distance driven/interval informa- tion switch to ON and, while the oil service
[Total Saving] tion. message is displayed within 3 seconds, push
View: 3) Turn the switch and set the interval (mile- both the and switches at the same
The estimated CO2 exhaust emissions pre- age) accordingly. For interval (mileage) de- time for more than 5 seconds.
vented. tails, see the separately provided Warranty The display goes blank for 1 second; the de-
Information and Maintenance booklet. fault interval is then displayed; and finally the
The time that the engine has been stopped
by the Stop/Start System. 4) Short press the switch to confirm the set display returns to normal.
interval (mileage).
NOTE [Tyre]
Reset procedure after changing engine oil. Select this submenu to set or reset the distance
The [Total Saving] values cannot be reset
and show accumulated Stop/Start System CAUTION for replacing tyres.
information since the vehicle was built. Do not perform the reset operation unless [Other]
For more information, see Stop/Start System the engine oil has been changed. Select this submenu and set or reset the dis-
(where fitted) in the 5. Starting and driving sec- For Petrol models j
A: tance for replacing or checking other items.
tion.
1) Select [Service]. To return to the previous page of the setting mode,
select [Back].
2) Select [Reset].

2-20 Instruments and controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

For more information, contact your NISSAN dealer CRUISE indicator disappears. When the
or qualified workshop. CRUISE indicator is displayed, the cruise con- WARNING
trol system is operational. In freezing temperatures the washer fluid may
[Language]
The cruise control SET indicator is displayed freeze on the windscreen and obscure your vi-
Select the submenu to set the desired language of while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise sion. Warm the windscreen with the defroster
the display control system. If the SET indicator blinks while before you wash it.
[Factory] the engine is running, it may indicate that the CAUTION
cruise control system is not functioning properly.
Select the submenu to reset the factory settings of Have the system checked by an NISSAN dealer Do not open/release the bonnet when the
the display. or qualified workshop. front wiper arms are raised from their original
position.
NOTE For more details, see Cruise control (where
When resetting [Factory], all previous settings fitted) in the 5. Starting and driving section. Do not operate the washer continuously for
more than 15 seconds.
made are changed to default. The LIMIT indicator is displayed when the speed
CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER limiter main ON/OFF switch is pushed. When Do not operate the washer if the reservoir
the main switch is pushed again, the LIMIT indi- tank is empty or frozen.
INDICATOR (where fitted) cator disappears.
When the LIMIT indicator is displayed, the speed
limiter is operational. The speed limiter is active,
when the SET indicator is displayed.
For more details, see Speed limiter in the
5. Starting and driving section.
When the trip computer was set before using the
cruise control or speed limiter function, the trip com-
puter menu item j A is shown together with the
NIC1550
cruise control or speed limiter. See Trip computer
earlier in this section
The CRUISE indicator is displayed when the
cruise control main ON/OFF switch is pushed.
When the main switch is pushed again, the

Instruments and controls 2-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


WINDSCREEN Lever position j 1 : Intermittent ( ) or AUTO. Rain sensor (where fitted)
AUTO (where fitted) operates the rain-sensing auto
wiper system. (See Rain sensor (where fitted) later The rain sensor is activated when the AUTO posi-
in this section.). tion j
1 of the wiper switch is selected.

The intermittent operation speed can be adjusted The wiper will start to operate automatically at a suit-
by rotating the ring forward jA (slower) or back- able speed when rain is detected on the windscreen.
ward jB (faster). The sensitivity of the rain sensing system can be
The wiper operation speed will vary (where fit- adjusted by rotating the ring of the wiper switch for-
ted) in accordance with the vehicle speed. For ex- ward j A less sensitive, or backward j B more
ample, when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit- sensitive.
NIC1471 tent operation speed will be faster. NOTE
Intermittent (without rain sensor)
Lever position Low ( )j
2 for continuous low The rain sensor is only intended for use during
speed operation rain or precipitation. During other weather condi-
Lever position High ( )j
3 for continuous high tions no harm will come to the rain sensor sys-
speed operation tem if left active (wiper switch set to AUTO), al-
though occasional unexpected activation of the
Washer operation wipers may occur.
Pull the lever toward you j 5 to operate the washer.
For every fifth operation of the wiper and washer,
the headlight washing system (where fitted) will be
activated to clean the headlights. The headlight
NIC1469 washing system is only activated while the headlight
AUTO (with rain sensor) switch is in the position. See Headlight
cleaner (where fitted) later in this section.
The windscreen wiper and washer can be operated
when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Wiper drip wipe system (where fitted):
Wiper operation The wiper will also operate once about 3 seconds
after the washer and wiper are operated. This op-
Move the lever up or down to operate the wiper at eration is to wipe washer fluid that has dripped on
the following speeds: the windscreen.
Lever position Up j4 for a single sweep opera-
tion of the wiper.

2-22 Instruments and controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DEFOGGER SWITCH

REAR WINDOW To operate the rear window washer, push the switch REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
towards the front of the vehicle j
3 . The rear win-
dow wiper will also operate.
NOTE
When the windscreen wiper switch is in either
the intermittent or AUTO (where fitted), low or
high speed position and the vehicles gear lever
is set in Reverse, the rear window wiper comes
on (where fitted).
NIC1472 Wiper drip wipe system (where fitted) NIC1326Z

The wiper will also operate once about 3 seconds


after the washer and wiper are operated. This op- To defog/defrost the rear window glass, start the
WARNING
eration is to wipe washer fluid that has dripped on engine and push the (Type A or Type B) switch in.
In freezing temperatures the washer solution the windscreen. The indicator light will come on. Push the switch
may freeze on the rear window and obscure your again to turn the defogger off.
vision. Warm the rear window with the rear win-
dow defogger before you wash the rear window. The defogger will turn off automatically after ap-
proximately 15 minutes if the rear window clears
CAUTION before this time, push the switch again to turn the
Do not operate the washer continuously for defogger off.
more than 15 seconds. CAUTION
Do not operate the washer if the reservoir When cleaning the inner side of the rear window,
tank is empty or frozen. be careful not to scratch or damage the electri-
The rear window wiper and washer can be oper- cal conductors.
ated when the ignition switch is in the ON position. NOTE
Turn the switch clockwise to the intermittent ( , When the air conditioner, or rear defogger is
j1 ) position or continuous ( , j
2 ) position to turned on the Stop/Start System will not be acti-
operate the wiper. vated (For models with the Stop/Start System).

Instruments and controls 2-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH

OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFOGGER XENON HEADLIGHTS (where fitted) will become reddish. If one or more of the above
(where fitted) signs occur, contact a NISSAN dealer or quali-
WARNING fied workshop.
The outside rear-view mirrors will be defogged when
the defogger switch is activated. HIGH VOLTAGE NISSAN recommends you to consult the local regu-
lations concerning the use of lights.
When xenon headlights are on, they produce
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock,
never attempt to modify or disassemble. Al-
ways have your xenon headlights replaced at
an authorised NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop.
Xenon headlights provide considerably more
light than conventional headlights. If they are
not correctly aimed, they might temporarily
blind an oncoming driver or the driver ahead
of you and cause a serious accident. If head-
lights are not aimed correctly, immediately NIC1302Z

take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer or quali-


fied workshop and have the headlights ad-
justed correctly. Lighting
Turn the switch to the m position:
When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its
brightness or colour varies slightly. However, the 1 The front side, tail, number plate and instru-
j
colour and brightness will soon stabilise. ment lights will come on. The indicator light

The life of xenon headlights will be shortened by m in the instrument panel will come on.
frequent on-off operation. It is generally desir-
able not to turn off the headlights for short inter- Turn the switch to the m position:
vals (for example, when the vehicle stops at a 2 The headlights will come on and all the
j
traffic signal). other lights remain on.
If the xenon headlight bulb is close to burning CAUTION
out, the brightness will drastically decrease, the
light will start blinking, or the colour of the light Never leave the light switch on for extended peri-
ods of time while the engine is not running.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Daytime light system (where fitted) To activate the autolight system: Friendly Lighting
Even if the headlight switch is off, the headlight low 1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position The Friendly Lighting function is a convenience
beam, front side, rear combination and number plate j1. facility. It allows you to provide lighting from the
lights will come on after starting the engine. How- 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON. vehicle after the ignition switch has been turned to
ever, you cannot change low beam to high beam the LOCK position and the headlight switch is in the
when the light switch is off. To disable the autolight system: OFF or AUTO (where fitted) position. Pulling the
Turn the switch to the OFF, or position. headlight switch toward you once will activate the
When the light switch is turned to the position,
headlight for approximately 30 seconds. After that
the headlight low beam will turn off. Headlight beam select period of time, it will automatically switch off.
Autolight system (AUTO where fitted) It is possible to pull the headlight switch up to four
times to increase the lighting period up to 2 minutes.
NOTE
The Friendly Lighting function can be cancelled
by switching the ignition switch to the Acc or ON
position again.
Battery save function
NIC1304Z The battery save feature prevents your vehicle from
discharging the battery after you have left the exter-
NIC1303Z
nal lights, map lamps or room lamps on when exit-
1 To select the high beam when in the
j posi- ing the vehicle. This occurs when the ignition switch
tion, push the lever forward. The high beam or ignition knob is in the OFF or LOCK position.
The autolight system allows the headlights to be set
lights come on and the indicator light
so they turn on and off automatically. When active,
illuminates. NOTE
the autolight system will:
2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam
j The next time the engine is started the external
Turn on the headlights, front side, tail, number
( position). lights, map lamps or room lamp will come on
plate and instrument panel lights automatically
again
when it gets dark. 3 Pulling the lever towards you will flash the
j
headlight high beam, even when the headlight
Turn off all the lights when it gets light.
switch is off.

Instruments and controls 2-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FOG LIGHT SWITCH

Battery save function for external lights: Lane change signal FRONT FOG LIGHT (where fitted)
If the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Move the lever only part of the way up or down j 1
but the external lights are accidentally left on, the to signal a lane change (right or left). The indicator
external lights will automatically be switched off as lights will flash three times before cancelling auto-
soon as the drivers door is opened. matically.
It is possible to leave the external lights on perma- Direction indicator
nently by switching them back on using the head-
light switch while the ignition switch is still in the Move the lever up or down j 2 to indicate right or
LOCK or OFF position. In this case, the light re- left. When the turn is completed, the turn signal is
minder chime will sound when the drivers door is automatically cancelled.
opened.
Battery save function for interior light:
The interior light will automatically be switched off
after approximately 15 minutes if it has been acci-
dentally left on.
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

NIC1307

A Type A
j
NIC1384Z
B Type B
j
The front fog lights should only be used when visibil-
ity is seriously reduced generally, to less than 100
m (328 ft).
Turn the headlight switch to the or posi-

2-26 Instruments and controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


HEADLIGHT AIMING CONTROL

tion and turn the fog light switch to the position NOTE HEADLIGHT AIMING CONTROL
j1 . The front fog lights and indicator light will come SWITCH (where fitted)
If the headlight switch is turned from the
on. For additional information, see Warning/indica-
position, the rear fog light will switch off auto-
tor lights and audible reminders earlier in this sec-
matically.
tion.
To turn the front fog lights off, turn the fog light Type j
B (with front fog lights)
switch to the OFF position. To turn the rear fog light on:
REAR FOG LIGHT 1. Turn the headlight switch to the or
position.
The rear fog light should only be used when visibility
is seriously reduced generally, to less than 100 m 2. Turn the fog light switch to the position
(328 ft). j2:
NIC1424

Type j
A (without front fog lights) The rear and front fog lights and both indicator
lights will come on
To turn the rear fog light on: Depending on the number of occupants in the ve-
The fog light switch will return to the position hicle and the load it is carrying, the headlight axis
1. Turn the headlight switch to the position. j1 may be higher than desired. If the vehicle is travel-
2. Turn the fog light switch to the position j
1: To turn the rear fog light off: ling on a hilly road, the headlights may directly hit the
The rear fog light and indicator light will come on rear-view mirror of the vehicle ahead or the wind-
Turn the fog light switch to the position j
2 screen of an oncoming vehicle. The light axis can be
The fog light switch will return to the OFF posi- again: lowered using the switch located on the drivers
tion ( ) The rear fog light and indicator light will switch side of the instrument panel, next to the steering
To turn the rear fog light off: off wheel.
Turn the fog light switch to the position j
1 again: The fog light switch will return to the position The higher the number designated on the switch,
the lower the axis.
The rear fog light and indicator light will switch NOTE
off When travelling with no heavy load on a flat road,
If the headlight switch is turned to the OFF posi- select position 0.
The fog light switch will return to the OFF posi- tion, the rear fog light will switch off automati-
tion ( ) cally. AUTOMATIC AIMING CONTROL
For additional information, see Warning/indicator (xenon headlights)
lights and audible reminders earlier in this section. Vehicles with xenon headlights are equipped with
an automatic levelling system. The headlight axis is
controlled automatically.

Instruments and controls 2-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


HEADLIGHT CLEANER HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
(where fitted) SWITCH

NISSAN recommends consulting local regulations To clean the headlights, pull the windscreen washer
on the use of lights. switch towards you while the headlight switch is in
the position and the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
NOTE
The headlight cleaner will automatically operate
every fifth operation of the wiper and washer
switch.
See Wiper and washer switch earlier in this sec- NIC1519
tion
CAUTION Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you
must stop or park under emergency conditions. All
Do not operate the cleaner continuously for
direction indicator lights will flash.
more than 15 seconds.
Do not operate the cleaner if the washer fluid
reservoir is empty or frozen.
See Window washer fluid/headlight cleaner fluid
(where fitted) in the 8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself section for details on refilling the res-
ervoir tank.

2-28 Instruments and controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


HORN SEAT HEATING (where fitted)

4. The seat heater switches illuminate when either


heat setting is selected and will remain on as
long as the switch is on.
5. When the vehicles interior has warmed-up, or
before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the
seat heater system off.
CAUTION
Do not use the seat heater system for a long
NIC1352Z NIC1429 period of time when the engine is not running,
otherwise the battery could run down.

To sound the horn, push the centre pad area j


1 of The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. Do not put anything on the seat that insulates
the steering wheel. the heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat
The switches are located on the centre console and cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may overheat.
can be operated independently from each other (j A
for the left-hand side seat, j
B for the right-hand side Do not place anything hard or heavy on the
seat). seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object.
This may damage the heater.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
NOTE
Any liquid spilled on a heated seat should be
removed immediately with a dry cloth.
The seat heater can only be activated when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
When cleaning the seat, never use benzine,
thinner or any similar materials.
2. Start the engine.
If any abnormalities are found or the heating
3. Select the heat range: does not operate, turn off the switch and have
the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or
Press the forward part of the switch (large qualified workshop.
dot) to activate the HIGH heat setting.
Press the rear part of the switch (small dot) to
activate the LOW heat setting.
For no heat, the switch has a central OFF
position between HIGH and LOW.

Instruments and controls 2-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


POWER OUTLET

Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12


volt, 120 W (10 A) power draw. Do not use
double adaptors or more than one electrical
accessory.
Use this power outlet with the engine running
(do not use for extended periods of time with
the engine stopped or idling).
Avoid using when the air conditioner, head-
lights or rear window defogger are on.
NIC1372Z

Front row When not in use, be sure that the cap is


closed. Do not allow water to come into con-
tact with the outlet.
Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be
sure to turn off the power switch of the elec-
trical accessory being used or the Acc power
of the vehicle.
Fully push the plug in sufficiently. If sufficient
contact is not made, the plug may overheat or
the internal temperature fuse may blow.
NIC1451

2nd row (7-seater)

WARNING
Take care as the power outlet and plug may be
hot during or immediately after use.
CAUTION
This power outlet is not designed for use with
a cigarette lighter unit.

2-30 Instruments and controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


STORAGE

(LHD) model. On the Right-Hand Drive (RHD)


model, these components are located on the
opposite side.

WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays to help
prevent injury in an accident or sudden stop.
GLOVE BOX

NIC1732

WARNING
NIC1734 Keep the glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden
stop.
STORAGE TRAYS 6
j Glove box, Cool box*, Sunglasses holder
To open the glove box, lift the latch and lower the lid.
1 Rear cup holders (5-seater)
j 7
j Front cup holders
2 Bottle holder
j 8
j Seat pockets* Cool box (where fitted)
9
j Rear cup holders (7-seater) When the engine is running and the air conditioning
3 Console box
j is switched on, cool air will enter the glove box
4 Map pocket
j * where fitted through the opening as illustrated j
1.
5 Storage trays*
j The layout illustrated is for the Left-Hand Drive

Instruments and controls 2-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Sunglasses holder CAUTION ROOF RAIL (where fitted)
Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the
WARNING cup holder is being used to prevent spillage.
If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your pas-
The sunglasses holder should not be used
senger.
while driving so that full attention may be given
to vehicle operation. Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard
objects can injure you in an accident.
Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses
holder while parking in direct sunlight. The BOTTLE HOLDER
heat may damage the sunglasses.
CAUTION
The glove box contains a sunglasses storage area, NIC1452
which is accessible when the glove box is open. Do not use the bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in the ve-
CONSOLE BOX hicle and possibly injure people during sud- Luggage can be carried on the roof by securing
den braking or an accident. crossbars to the roof rail. Follow all crossbar manu-
WARNING facturers instructions for installing and use of the
Do not use the bottle holder for open liquid crossbars. The roof rail is designed to carry loads
The centre console box should not be used while containers. (luggage plus crossbars) below 75 kg (165 lb).
driving so that full attention may be given to ve- Overloading may cause damage to the vehicle.
hicle operation. MAP POCKET (where fitted)
Pull the lid up to open the console box. Map pockets are located in the doors.

CUP HOLDERS SEAT POCKET (where fitted)


A seat pocket (where fitted) is located on the back
WARNING or side of the driver and/or passenger seat.
Cup holders should not be used while driving so
that full attention may be given to vehicle opera-
tion.
To access the rear cup holders (where fitted), lower
the centre armrest.

2-32 Instruments and controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


REAR PARCEL SHELF (where fitted) TONNEAU COVER (where fitted)

WARNING
Never put anything on the tonneau cover, no
matter how small. Any object on it could cause
an injury in case of an accident or if the brakes
are applied suddenly.
Do not leave the tonneau cover in position
when it is disengaged from the grooves.

NPA838Z
Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo
higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
CAUTION or collision, unsecured cargo could cause per-
WARNING sonal injury
Make sure the rear parcel shelf is carefully stored
Never put anything on the rear parcel shelf, no when not in use in order to prevent any damage. The child restraint top tether strap may be
matter how small. Any object on it could cause damaged by contact with the tonneau cover
an injury in an accident or when the brakes are Installation:
or items in the luggage compartment area.
applied suddenly. 1. Open the back door. Remove the tonneau cover from the vehicle
Removal: or store it in its storage space. Also, secure
2. Position the parcel shelf j
3 over the rear seat-
any lose items in the luggage compartment.
1. Open the back door (see Back door lock ear- back fasteners j 2 and push downwards until
Your child could be seriously injured or killed
lier in this section). they click into place.
in a collision if the top tether strap is dam-
2. Detach both of the ropes (left and right) j
1 from 3. Attach the corresponding ropes to each side j
1 aged.
the inside of the back door. of the back door.
The tonneau cover keeps the luggage compartment
3. Detach the parcel shelf from the rear seatback 4. Close the back door (see Back door lock ear- contents hidden from the outside. It can only be
fasteners j
2 by carefully pulling the corners up- lier in this section). used when the 3rd row seats are folded down.
wards.
4. Lift the parcel shelf j
3 up and rotate horizontally
to remove through the back door opening.

Instruments and controls 2-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


WINDOWS

POWER WINDOWS
The power window switches are located on the door
panel and will only operate when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.

WARNING
Make sure to remove the key from the ignition
switch and take it with you when leaving the
NPA991 NPA992
vehicle. If children are left unattended inside
the vehicle they could unknowingly activate
switches.
Removal: Storage:
Make sure that all passengers have their
1) Pull the tonneau cover at the grip j
1 slightly up 1) Remove the luggage floor covers j
1, j
2 and hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in
and backward, then slide it forward. j3. motion and before closing the windows. Use
2) Push the sliding button j2 at the right hand side 2) Fit the tonneau cover under the luggage com- the power window lock switch to prevent un-
to disengage it from the groove. partment floor in its storage space. Use the expected use of the power windows.

3) Then remove the tonneau cover j


3 completely.
straps j4 at the right and left side. It is recommended to instruct all occupants in
3) Replace the covers j
1,j
2 and j
3. the safe operation of power windows with par-
To fit the tonneau cover, first fit the left side, then at ticular emphasis given to the safety and su-
the right hand side, push it into the groove j 2 until pervision of children.
the stem engages.

NIC1309Z

Left hand drive models

2-34 Instruments and controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


To stop the window opening or closing, just push or To activate the power window lock function, push
pull the switch in the opposite direction. the switch.
Auto-reverse function: To cancel the power window lock function, push the
When the control unit detects an object obstructing switch again.
the drivers side window, as it closes, the window System reinitialisation:
will open automatically.
The drivers side main power window system will
The auto-reverse function remains active only when require reinitialisation whenever:
the drivers side window is being closed automati-
cally. The power window system does not function
NIC1377Z properly for example the auto-reverse function is
Right hand drive models not working.
WARNING
Drivers side main switch The battery cable is reconnected.
There are some areas immediately before the
1 Drivers side automatic window switch
j closed position where squeezing cannot be The fuse is replaced.
2 Power window lock switch
j detected. Be careful not to pinch your fingers. Perform the following procedure to initialise the
3 Passenger power window switches
j The auto-reverse function does not work power window system.
when the window is closed manually (holding 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position
The drivers side control panel is equipped with the switch in the close position).
switches to operate the passenger power windows 2. Close the door.
and a power window lock switch. CAUTION
3. Push down and hold the drivers side window
Automatic operation: Depending on the environment or driving condi- switch until the window glass is completely low-
tions, the auto-reverse function may be activated ered then release the switch.
WARNING if an impact or load similar to something being
caught in the window occurs. 4. In one continuous operation, pull up and hold
Make sure there is no obstruction when closing the drivers side window switch until the window
the drivers side window using the drivers side Power window lock switch: glass is completely closed and continue holding
automatic window switch. Dependant on the vehicle specifications, when the the switch for a further 5 seconds.
power window lock function is activated, either:
To fully open the drivers side window, completely 5. The system is now reinitialised.
push down or pull up the drivers side automatic the rear passenger window switches are dis- If the reinitialisation procedure cannot be performed
window switch and release it; it does not need to be abled; or successfully, take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer
held. The window will automatically open or close all
the way. the front and rear passenger window switches or qualified workshop.
are disabled.

Instruments and controls 2-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


C-VIEW GLASS ROOF
(where fitted)

SUNSHADE OPERATION
The C-View sunshade operates only when the ig-
nition switch is in the ON position.

WARNING
Never allow hands or fingers, or any part of your
body within operating range of the sunshade. You
could be injured.
NIC1425 NIC1263Z
Opening and closing
Manual control:
Passenger power window switches 1 Open
j To open the sunshade press and hold the OPEN
The passenger power window switches j
4 operate 2 Close
j side of the switch j 1 . To stop the sunshade from
the corresponding passenger window only. opening fully, release the switch.
CAUTION
To open or close the window, push and hold the To close the sunshade, press and hold the CLOSE
switch down or up.
Do not place heavy objects on the C-View
side of the switch j 2 . To stop the sunshade from
glass or surrounding area.
closing fully, release the switch.
To stop the window from opening or closing, simply
release the switch.
Do not hang from the sunshade or hang any
Automatic operation:
objects from it. It may cause damage or de-
formation to the sunshade. To fully open or close the sunshade automatically,
press briefly on the open or close side of the switch
Close the sunshade when you leave the ve- and then release. To stop the sunshade from open-
hicle for extended periods of time to prevent ing or closing, press either side of the switch.
the inside of the vehicle from reaching high
temperatures. Auto-reverse function:
When the control unit detects something caught in
the sunshade, the sunshade will open automatically.
NOTE
The auto-reverse function remains active
whether the sunshade is being closed manually
or automatically.

2-36 Instruments and controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


INTERIOR LIGHTS

SYSTEM REINITIALISATION If the reinitialisation procedure cannot be performed CAUTION


successfully, take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer
The C-View sunshade will require reinitialisation Do not use for extended periods of time with the
or qualified workshop.
whenever: engine stopped. This could discharge the bat-
tery.
The sunshade system does not function prop-
erly. NOTE
The battery cable is reconnected. The interior lights will go off after approximately
15 minutes unless the ignition switch is in the
The fuse is replaced.
Acc or ON position.
Perform the following procedure to initialise the sun-
shade system. FRONT ROOM LIGHT
1. Make sure the vehicle battery is connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
3. Press and hold the CLOSE side of the switch.
The system will now proceed as follows:
a. If open, the sunshade will start moving to the
closed position.
b. After a few seconds, the system will fully open NIC1573
the sunshade.
c. From the fully open position, it returns to the The room light has a three-position switch j
1.
closed position.
Position Lighting
4. After reaching the closed position, release the
sunshade switch. Light is always on
m
5. The sunshade system is now reinitialised. Light comes on when a door is
Middle
opened
NOTE 0 Light remains off
Do not disconnect the power for at least 2
seconds.

Instruments and controls 2-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Room light timer (where fitted) REAR ROOM/READING LIGHT VANITY MIRROR LIGHT (where fitted)
The room light will stay on for approximately 30 sec-
onds when:
The ignition is switched off.
The doors are unlocked.
Any door is opened and then closed.
The timer is cancelled, and the interior light will turn
off when:
The doors are locked.
Room light (where fitted)
NIC1258Z NIC1257Z

The ignition switch is turned to the ON position.


The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when the
MAP LIGHTS (where fitted) cover is opened.
To switch on the map light, press either or of
the switches j2.
To turn the map light off, press 0

NIC1256Z

Reading light (where fitted)

The light can be switched on or off by pressing the


switch j3.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT
The light comes on automatically when the back
door is opened.

2-38 Instruments and controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys ........................................................................ 3-2 Inside door handle .............................................. 3-10


NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)* key ............. 3-2 Power door lock switch ...................................... 3-10
Intelligent Key (where fitted)................................ 3-2 Child safety lock rear doors............................ 3-11
Key number ........................................................ 3-3 Back door lock ................................................... 3-12
New keys ........................................................... 3-3 Security system ....................................................... 3-13
Emergency/mechanical key (Intelligent Key Alarm system (where fitted) ................................ 3-13
models) .............................................................. 3-3 NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)..................... 3-13
Integrated keyfob/remote control system.................. 3-3 Bonnet release ........................................................ 3-14
Switching from Convenience mode to Fuel filler lid ............................................................. 3-15
Anti-hijack mode ................................................. 3-4 Fuel filler lid opener lever .................................... 3-15
Using the remote keyless entry system................ 3-5 Fuel filler cap ...................................................... 3-15
Locking the doors............................................... 3-5 Handbrake lever ...................................................... 3-16
Unlocking the doors............................................ 3-5 Steering wheel......................................................... 3-16
Keyfob operation failure ...................................... 3-6 Sun visors ............................................................... 3-17
Intelligent Key system (where fitted) ......................... 3-6 Mirrors..................................................................... 3-17
Intelligent Key operating range ............................ 3-6 Inside rear-view mirror ........................................ 3-17
Using Intelligent Key system................................ 3-7 Automatic anti-dazzling inside mirror (where
Locking/unlocking .............................................. 3-7 fitted).................................................................. 3-17
Starting the engine with the Intelligent Key .......... 3-8 Outside rear-view mirrors.................................... 3-17
Door locks ............................................................... 3-9 Vanity mirror ....................................................... 3-19
Super Lock system (RHD models) ...................... 3-9
Locking/unlocking with the key (vehicle dead
battery)............................................................... 3-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


KEYS

NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM The Intelligent Key is water resistant; how-


(NATS)* KEY ever, wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, imme-
Your vehicle can only be driven with the keys spe- diately wipe until it is completely dry.
cific to your vehicle. Only NISSAN Anti-Theft Sys-
tem (NATS)* keys can be used with your vehicle Do not allow the Intelligent Key to come
(see Security system later in this section). into contact with water or salt water this
could affect the system function.
INTELLIGENT KEY (where fitted)
Do not bend, drop or strike it against an-
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent other object.
NPA1052
Keys, which are registered to your vehicles Intelli-
Integrated keyfob and key number plate Do not place the Intelligent Key for an ex-
gent Key system components and NISSAN Anti-
tended period in a place where tempera-
Theft System (NATS*) components. As many as 4
tures exceed 60C (140F).
Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with
one vehicle. The new keys must be registered by a Do not change or modify the Intelligent
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop prior to use Key.
with the Intelligent Key system and NATS of your
Do not use a magnetic key holder.
vehicle. Since the registration process requires
erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo- Do not place the Intelligent Key near equip-
nents when registering new keys, be sure to take all ment that produces a magnetic field such
Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer as a TV, audio equipment and personal
or qualified workshop. computers.
NPA1049

Intelligent Key with emergency/mechanical key


*: Immobilizer If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that In-
CAUTION
1. Intelligent Key telligent Key. This will prevent the Intelligent
2. Emergency/Mechanical key (inside the Intel- Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you. Key from unauthorised use to unlock the ve-
Do not leave the vehicle with the Intelligent hicle. For information regarding the erasing
ligent Key), see Emergency/mechanical key
Key inside. procedure, please contact a NISSAN dealer
(Intelligent Key models) later in this section
or qualified workshop.
3. Key number plate Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you
when driving. The Intelligent Key is a preci-
sion device with a built-in transmitter. To avoid
damaging it, please note the following.

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


INTEGRATED KEYFOB/REMOTE
CONTROL SYSTEM

KEY NUMBER EMERGENCY/MECHANICAL KEY


A key number plate j
3 is supplied with your key (Intelligent Key models)
Record the key number on the Security Informa-
tion page at the end of this manual and keep it in a
safe place, but not in the vehicle. The key can only
be duplicated using an original key or the original
key number. The key number is required when you
have lost all of the keys and do not have the original
key to duplicate from. If the key is lost, or you need
NPA1082
extra keys, provide an original key or the key number
Integrated keyfob
to a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
NPA1050
NISSAN does not record key numbers, so it is very
important that you keep a record of your key num-
ber. The emergency key can be used to unlock the driv-
ers door and start the engine in emergency situa-
NEW KEYS tions (e.g. Intelligent Key dead battery).
As many as four NATS keys can be registered to To use the mechanical key, release the lock knob
one vehicle at any one time. New keys must be reg- located on the side of the Intelligent Key then slide
istered to the NATS components of your vehicle by and remove the cap. Unfold the mechanical key from
a NISSAN dealer. its housing until it locks in place.
NPA1083
When registering a new key at a NISSAN dealer, Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
you are requested to bring all of your NATS keys Intelligent key
(See Door locks later in this section.)
with you. This is necessary because the registration The remote keyless entry system can operate all
process will erase and reprogram the memory of For further details on accessing and using the emer- door locks (including the back door) using the inte-
your vehicles NATS components. gency key, see Ignition knob (where fitted) in the grated keyfob. The integrated keyfob can operate at
5. Starting and driving section. a distance of approximately 5 m (15 ft) from the
NOTE
NOTE vehicle (the effective distance depends upon the
A key number is only required if you have lost all conditions around the vehicle and the state of the
of your keys and do not have one to duplicate For the driver side door, it is normal for the key keyfob battery).
from. If you still have a key, this key can be dupli- not to go all the way into the key cylinder.
As many as 5 remote controllers can be used with
cated by a NISSAN dealer.
one vehicle. For information about the purchase and

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


use of additional remote controllers, contact a Always remove the ignition key or Intelligent SWITCHING FROM CONVENIENCE
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. Key, close all windows before operating the MODE TO ANTI-HIJACK MODE
keyfob door lock system.
The integrated keyfob will not function under the fol- Selective unlock or Anti-hijack mode allows the
lowing conditions: Ensure that the drivers door is securely remote unlocking of only the drivers door to prevent
closed before operating the integrated keyfob
When the distance between the integrated key-
door lock system for correct operation of the
an attacker from entering the vehicle via an unlocked
fob and vehicle is more than approximately 5 m passenger door.
system.
(15 ft). As default, the unlock mode will be set to Conve-
When the integrated keyfob battery is Do not allow the integrated keyfob, which nience mode (all doors will unlock). Follow the in-
contains electrical components, to come into structions below to switch between convenience
discharged.
contact with water or salt water. This could mode and anti-hijack mode.
When the key is in the ignition switch. affect the system function.
A Key with integrated keyfob (from
j
All doors can be locked or unlocked from the out- Do not drop the integrated keyfob.
outside the vehicle)
side by pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK
button on the integrated keyfob. Do not strike the integrated keyfob sharply
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
against another object.
For Super Lock system models only (RHD mod- 2. Press and hold both the LOCK and UN-
els): Do not place the integrated keyfob for an ex-
LOCK buttons for 5 seconds.
tended period in an area where temperatures
When the vehicle is occupied, never lock the exceed 60C (140F). Setting anti-hijack mode:
doors with the integrated keyfob. Doing so will
If a integrated keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec- The direction indicators flash once.
trap the occupants, since the Super Lock system
ommends erasing the ID code of that integrated Setting convenience mode:
prevents the doors from being opened from the
keyfob from the vehicle. This may prevent the unau-
inside. The direction indicators flash three times.
thorised use of the integrated keyfob to unlock the
vehicle. For information regarding the erasing pro- B Intelligent Key
j
WARNING cedure, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
Only operate the integrated keyfob lock button in shop. 1. Turn the ignition switch from ON to LOCK and
full and clear view of the vehicle to prevent any- exit the vehicle.
For information regarding the replacement of a bat-
body being trapped inside the vehicle. tery, see Battery in the 8. Maintenance and 2. From outside the vehicle, lock the vehicle using
CAUTION do-it-yourself section. the integrated keyfob LOCK button .
3. Press and hold both the LOCK and UN-
When locking the doors using the integrated
LOCK buttons for 10 seconds.
keyfob, be sure not to leave the key in the
vehicle. 4. Within 3 seconds, press and hold the drivers

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


door outside lock switch until the direction indi- Setting convenience mode: LOCKING THE DOORS
cators flash to confirm the setting mode. Then
The message [All door unlock] appears on CAUTION
release the drivers door outside lock switch.
the vehicle information display (inside the ve-
hicle). Before operating the keyfob remote control:

See Warning/indicator lights and audible Remove the ignition key or Intelligent Key
reminders in the 2. Instruments and controls sec- from the vehicle and close all windows.
tion and Vehicle information display in the 2. In- Check that the drivers door is securely
struments and controls section for further details. closed.
USING THE REMOTE KEYLESS Push the LOCK button on the integrated key-
ENTRY SYSTEM fob.
All the doors lock.
NPA1041
WARNING
The direction indicators flash once.
Super Lock system equipped models:
5. Setting anti-hijack mode: If the LOCK button is pushed with all the doors
Failure to follow the precautions below may lead locked, the direction indicators will flash once to
The message [Single door unlock] appears to hazardous situations. Make sure the Super remind you that the doors are already locked.
on the vehicle information display (inside the Lock system activation is always conducted
vehicle). safely. UNLOCKING THE DOORS
When the vehicle is occupied, never lock the Convenience mode
doors with the integrated keyfob. Doing so Push the UNLOCK button on the integrated
will trap the occupants, since the Super Lock keyfob.
system prevents the doors from being opened
from the inside of the vehicle. The message [All door unlock] appears in the
vehicle information display.
Only operate the integrated keyfob LOCK
All doors unlock.
button when there is a clear view of the ve-
hicle. This is to prevent anybody from being The direction indicators flash twice.
NPA1040
trapped inside the vehicle through the Super
Lock system activation. Anti-hijack mode
For further details on the Super Lock system see 1. Push the UNLOCK button on the integrated
Super Lock system (RHD models) later in this keyfob.
section.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
(where fitted)

The message [Single door unlock] appears in


the vehicle information display.
Only the drivers door unlocks.
The direction indicators flash twice, quickly.
2. Push the UNLOCK button on the integrated
keyfob again.
All doors unlock.
The direction indicators flash twice. NPA1042 NPA1018

Auto-relock:
An auto-relock function will operate 2 minutes after NOTE The Intelligent Key system is a convenient keyless
a full or partial unlock, if no further user action is entry system that allows you to operate your vehicle
See Intelligent Key detection warning, Intelligent
taken. The auto-relock will be cancelled if any door without using an actual key.
Key low battery warning or Intelligent Key system
is opened or the key is inserted into the ignition.
fault warning in Vehicle information display ear-
lier in this section for more information. WARNING
KEYFOB OPERATION FAILURE
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medi-
The keyfob may not work properly if:
cal equipment. Those who use a pacemaker
The keyfob battery is low. See Integrated key- should contact the electric medical equipment
fob/Intelligent Key battery replacement in the manufacturer for the possible influences before
8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section for use.
keyfob battery replacement instructions and the
required battery type. INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING
RANGE
The locking/unlocking system has been used
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when
continuously. An anti lock-abuse system pre-
vents the lock motors from overheating and dis- the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating
ables the keyfob locking operation for a short range from the request switch j 1.
period of time if the system is used continuously. When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
The door handle is being pulled while the strong radio waves are present near the operating
location, the Intelligent Key systems operating
keyfob is being operated.
range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key
The vehicles battery is dead. may not function properly.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


The operating range is within 80 cm (31.50 in) from LOCKING/UNLOCKING
each request switch j1.
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,
door handle or rear bumper, the request switches
may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who
does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the re-
quest switch to lock/unlock the doors including the
NPA1020
back door.
NPA1021
USING INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
Do not push the door handle request switch with
the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated.
The close distance to the door handle will cause
the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty rec-
ognising that the Intelligent Key is outside the
vehicle.
After locking the doors using the door handle
request switch, make sure that the doors have
been securely locked by operating the door
handles.
NPA1019

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in- NPA1022

side the vehicle, make sure you carry the key


The request switch will not function under the fol- with you and then lock the doors.
lowing conditions: The Intelligent Key system allows you to lock and

When the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle


Do not pull the door handle before pushing the unlock the drivers door, passenger doors, or back
door handle request switch. The door will be door without activating the integrated keyfob or us-
When the Intelligent Key is not within the opera- unlocked but will not open. Release the door ing the emergency key (drivers door key cylinder).
tional range handle once and pull it again to open the door. When near the vehicle, the Intelligent Key sends an
When any door is open or not closed securely ID code that allows the owner to manually lock/un-
lock the vehicle by pressing the drivers door, front
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged passengers door or back door outside lock switch.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Locking the doors Convenience mode: The Intelligent Key contains a miniature radio
Push the door/back door outside lock switch. transmitter that may be affected when placed
1. Make sure you have the Intelligent Key with you near metal objects.
when exiting the vehicle. All doors unlock.
2. Close all doors.
Keep the Intelligent Key away from mobile
The direction indicators flash twice. phones, laptop computers and other metal
3. Press any of the outside lock switches (front The message [All door unlock] appears in the objects or electronics.
doors or back door). vehicle information display. STARTING THE ENGINE WITH THE
All the doors lock. Anti-hijack mode: INTELLIGENT KEY
The direction indicators flash once. 1. Push the door/back door outside lock switch. See Ignition knob (where fitted) in the 5. Starting
Super Lock system equipped models: The Su- The corresponding door unlocks and driving section.
per Lock system will be activated CAUTION
The direction indicators flash twice quickly
CAUTION
The message [Single door unlock] appears in Make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with
Do not leave the duplicate Intelligent Key inside the vehicle information display. you when starting and driving the vehicle.
the vehicle as the locking procedure logic will
2. Push the door/back door outside lock switch If the Intelligent Key is too far away from the
not work. passenger compartment, the vehicle may not
again within 5 seconds.
NOTE start. See Intelligent Key operating range in
All doors unlock. the 3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments
If the Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle and the The direction indicators flash twice, slowly. section
door/back door outside lock switch is pressed, a
buzzer will sound, warning the owner that the NOTE
Intelligent Key has been left inside the vehicle.
External interference may impair the Intelligent
Unlocking the doors Keys operation. In this case, use the emergency
key located in the Intelligent Key integrated key-
For details on setting the unlock mode (anti-hijack or fob. See Door locks later in this section for fur-
convenience mode) see Switching from Conve- ther details.
nience mode to Anti-hijack mode earlier in this sec-
tion. CAUTION
Make sure the Intelligent Key battery is in good
condition. Note that battery life may vary de-
pending on condition, amount of use, ambi-
ent temperature, etc.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DOOR LOCKS

SUPER LOCK SYSTEM (RHD models) Emergency situations Locking without activating the Super
If the Super Lock system is activated while you are Lock system
WARNING inside the vehicle, for example by a traffic accident
Super Lock system equipped models: or other unexpected circumstances, follow the in- WARNING
structions below. Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when leav-
Failure to follow the precautions below may lead
to hazardous situations. Make sure the Super To release the Super Lock system: ing the vehicle.
Lock system activation is always conducted Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it Locking the doors using the door key cylinder or
safely. to the ON position. power door lock switch will not activate the Super
Lock system. See Power door lock switch later in
When the vehicle is occupied, never lock the All doors can now be unlocked and opened from
this section for further information.
doors with the integrated keyfob. Doing so inside the vehicle.
will trap the occupants, since the Super Lock LOCKING/UNLOCKING WITH THE
system prevents the doors from being opened Remove the key from the ignition switch and un-
lock the doors using the integrated keyfob UN- KEY (vehicle dead battery)
from the inside of the vehicle.
LOCK button .
Only operate the integrated keyfob LOCK
All doors can now be opened from inside the
button when there is a clear view of the ve-
hicle. This is to prevent anybody from being vehicle.
trapped inside the vehicle through the Super To unlock and open the drivers door from
Lock system activation. inside the vehicle while the Super Lock system
is active:
Pressing the LOCK button on the integrated
keyfob or locking the doors using one of the outside 1. Open or break the drivers door window.
door lock switches (Intelligent Key models) will acti- 2. Insert the key into the outside door key cylinder
vate the Super Lock system. and turn it towards the rear of the vehicle. NPA828Z

When the Super Lock system is active, none of the 3. The drivers door will unlock and can now be
doors can be opened from inside the vehicle. This opened from inside the vehicle. WARNING
provides additional security in case of theft or break-
in. When leaving the vehicle, do not leave the key
inside the vehicle.
The Super Lock system will be released when all
the doors are unlocked using the integrated keyfob Never leave children unattended in a vehicle
or an outside door lock switch (Intelligent Key mod- and always be sure you have your keys with
els). you when leaving. If an emergency occurs it
may be more difficult to help them otherwise.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


The drivers door can be locked/unlocked from out- INSIDE DOOR HANDLE 2 Press to unlock
j
side using the key/emergency key if the vehicles
battery is dead. WARNING
To lock the door, insert the key into the drivers door When leaving the vehicle, do not leave the key
key cylinder and turn it towards the front of the ve- inside the vehicle.
hicle j
1.
The power door lock switch, located on the centre
To unlock the door, turn the key towards the rear of console, can be used to lock j 1 or unlock j 2 all
the vehicle j
2. doors simultaneously from inside the vehicle.
See Ignition knob (where fitted) in the 5. Starting The switch will illuminate when the doors are locked.
and driving section for instructions on accessing SPA2531Z
the Intelligent Key system Emergency key. A chime will sound and the doors will not lock if the
power door lock switch is pressed while any door
CAUTION To unlock and open the door, pull the inside door other than the drivers door is open.
The alarm system will be triggered when the door handle as illustrated. NOTE
is opened using the key (NISSAN alarm equipped
models). To stop the alarm, turn the ignition key
With Super Lock (where fitted) Models without the Super Lock system: If a door
to the ON position or press the unlock button The door cannot be opened when the Super Lock is manually opened from inside after having
on the integrated keyfob. system is activated. pressed the integrated keyfob LOCK button, the
door will unlock, but the power door lock switch
Initialising the system after vehicle POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH will remain illuminated.
battery loading or replacement
Locking the doors when leaving the
After recharging or replacing the battery, you should vehicle
release (initialise) the system by:
It is possible to lock all doors using the power door
Inserting the key into the ignition switch and then lock switch when leaving the vehicle:
turning it to the ON position.
1. Open the drivers door, remove the key from the
Unlocking the vehicle using the integrated key- ignition or the Intelligent Key (where fitted) from
fob. the passenger compartment.
NPA952 2. Press the LOCK side of the power door lock
switch j1.

1 Press to lock
j All doors except the drivers door lock

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3. Close the drivers door. is pressed the drive away door locking system will CHILD SAFETY LOCK REAR
not lock the doors again until a door is opened and DOORS
The drivers door locks
closed.
The power door lock switch illuminates
To activate or deactivate drive-away door
Super Lock system models: The Super Lock locking:
system is not activated 1. Unlock the doors.
Intelligent Key models: If the Intelligent Key has 2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
been left inside the vehicle, all doors will unlock
and an alarm will sound 3. Activation

Super Lock equipped models (RHD Press and hold the LOCK side of the power
door lock switch j
1 for 5 seconds.
models) NPA859Z
Deactivation
If the doors are locked using the integrated keyfob
LOCK button or an outside door lock switch (In- Press and hold the UNLOCK side of the power The child safety lock helps prevent doors from be-
telligent Key models), the Super Lock system will be door lock switch j1 for 5 seconds. ing opened accidentally, especially when small chil-
activated. The power door lock switch will illuminate dren are in the vehicle.
4. A buzzer will sound if activation or deactivation
to indicate that all doors are locked, but it will not be
was successful. When the switch is in the LOCK position, the rear
possible to use the power door lock switch to un-
lock the doors. Once activated, drive-away door locking will func- door can only be opened from the outside.
tion on every subsequent trip.
Locking the doors with the power door lock switch
will not activate the Super Lock system.
Drive away door locking
When active, the drive away door locking function
will automatically lock all doors when the vehicle
speed exceeds 12 km/h (7 MPH).
All doors will be automatically unlocked when a front
door is opened except in anti-hijack mode (only the
drivers door or front passenger door will unlock); or
when opening a rear passenger door from the in-
side.
When UNLOCK, on the power door lock switch,

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


BACK DOOR LOCK outside, when the vehicle is not locked, by operat- Vehicle dead battery Back door lock
ing the microswitch j1 located on the back door release lever (where fitted)
underside.
NOTE
The back door cannot be opened from the out-
side when the power door lock switch is acti-
vated. An audible warning is heard when the
microswitch j 1 located on the back door under-
side is operated.
NPA914Z To open the back door, unlock it with one of the fol-
lowing operations, then push the back door mi-
croswitch j
1 and pull up to open it. NPA990

WARNING
Push the back door outside lock switch j 2
Always check that the back door has been (where fitted). See Intelligent Key system The vehicles back door can be unlocked from the
properly closed to prevent it from opening (where fitted) earlier in this section. inside when the battery is dead. Tilt the seatback
while driving. down. Remove the cover from the lock and slide the
Push the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent
release lever j1 as illustrated. See Rear seat(s) in
Do not drive with the back door opened. This Key (where fitted). See Intelligent Key system
the 1. Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental
could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be (where fitted) earlier in this section.
restraint system section for more information re-
drawn into the vehicle.
Push the UNLOCK button on the integrated garding the seat operation.
Closely supervise children when they are keyfob (where fitted). See Integrated keyfob/re-
around the vehicle to prevent them from play- mote control system earlier in this section.
ing and being locked in the luggage compart-
ment where they could be seriously injured.
Unlock all the doors using the key.
Keep the vehicle locked, with the back door Push the power door lock switch to the UN-
closed, when not in use, and prevent chil- LOCK position.
drens access to the vehicles keys. To close the back door, pull down and then push
The power door lock system allows you to lock or closed until securely locked.
unlock all doors including the back door.
The back door can be manually released from the

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SECURITY SYSTEM

ALARM SYSTEM (where fitted) The ignition circuit is turned on without the own- NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (NATS)
ers key being used.
The alarm system provides visual and audible alarm The NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)* will not
signals if parts of the vehicle are disturbed. The alarm system will stop when: allow the engine to start without the use of the reg-
How to arm the alarm system The vehicle is unlocked using the keyfob unlock istered NATS key.
button. * Immobilizer
1. Close all doors, windows, back door and bon-
net. The ignition switch or ignition knob is turned to If the engine fails to start using the registered NATS
the ON position with a registered NATS key. key, it may be due to interference from another
2. Lock the vehicle using the keyfob (lock button), NATS key, an automated toll road device or an auto-
for additional information, see Integrated key- If the system does not operate as described
above, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer or mated payment device on the key ring. Restart the
fob/remote control system in the 3. Pre-driving engine using the following procedure:
checks and adjustments section. qualified workshop.
Ultrasonic sensors (where fitted) 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for
NOTE approximately 5 seconds.
If the vehicle is not fully locked, a door/bonnet/ The ultrasonic sensors (volumetric sensing) detect
movements in the passengers compartment. When 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK
back door is open, or the ignition switch is in the position and wait approximately 5 seconds.
ON position (after arming the system), the buzzer the alarm system is set to the armed position, it will
will sound. After correctly closing, the buzzer will automatically switch on the ultrasonic sensors. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
stop. It is possible to exclude the ultrasonic sensors (e.g. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device
when leaving pets inside the car). (which may have caused the interference) sepa-
Alarm system operation
To exclude the ultrasonic sensors: rated from the registered NATS key or NATS
The system will give the following alarm: Intelligent Key (where fitted).
1. Turn the ignition switch 3 times within 7 seconds
The siren sounds intermittently and all direction
from the OFF to the ON position. If this procedure allows the engine to start,
indicators will flash. NISSAN recommends placing the registered
2. Close the door(s)/bonnet/back door and press NATS key or NATS Intelligent Key (where fitted)
The alarm automatically turns off after 28 sec-
the lock button on the keyfob to lock all doors/ on a separate key-ring to avoid interference from
onds.
back door. other devices.
The alarm is activated when:
The ultrasonic sensors are now excluded from the
The volumetric sensing system (ultrasonic sen- alarm system. All other functions of the system re-
sors) is triggered. main activated until the alarm system is disarmed
again.
Any door/the back door is opened.
The bonnet is opened.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


BONNET RELEASE

The NATS security indicator light (Type j B ) is


located on the Drivers side of the dashboard
and blinks whenever the ignition switch is in the
LOCK, OFF or Acc position.
If the NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) is mal-
functioning, this light will remain on while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
If the light remains on and/or the engine will not
start, see your NISSAN dealer for NATS service
SIC2045Z
as soon as possible. Please bring all NATS keys
Meters and gauges (Type A) or NATS Intelligent Keys when visiting your
NISSAN dealer for service.
Additional information for RHD models
If the NATS is malfunctioning, this light will turn on
after flashing six times while the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
However, if the NATS security warning light turns
off after the light has remained on for 15 minutes,
there is a 10 second time slot to start the engine
NIC1402Z after the ignition is turned off. See your NISSAN
Drivers side (Type B)
dealer for NATS service as soon as possible.

NATS security warning/indicator light


(where fitted)
One of the following functions (depending on the
vehicle specifications) indicates that the vehicle is
equipped with NATS:
The NATS security warning light (Type A) is lo-
cated in the meter panel and blinks whenever
the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or Acc NPA1002

position.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FUEL FILLER LID

A LHD models
j FUEL FILLER LID OPENER LEVER FUEL FILLER CAP
B RHD models
j
1. Pull the bonnet lock release lever j1 , located
below the instrument panel on the drivers side;
the bonnet will spring up slightly.
2. Slide the lever j
2 , at the front of the bonnet, with
your fingertips and raise the bonnet.
3. Insert the support rod j 3 into the slot on the
underside of the bonnet.
NPA1004 NPA832Z
4. When closing the bonnet, replace the support
rod in its original position, then slowly close the
bonnet and make sure it locks into place. A LHD models
j The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Tighten the
cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard.
B RHD models
j
WARNING Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder as illustrated
To open the fuel filler lid, pull up the opener lever,
while refuelling.
Always check whether the bonnet is closed and located below the instrument panel on the drivers
locked securely to prevent it from opening while side. To lock, close the fuel filler lid securely.
WARNING
driving. The vehicle should only be operated with
the bonnet securely closed. Fuel is extremely flammable and highly explo-
sive under certain conditions. Always stop the
engine and do not smoke or allow open flames
or sparks near the vehicle when refuelling.
Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap half
a turn and wait for any hissing sound to stop,
in order to prevent fuel from spraying out and
causing possible personal injury.
Use only a NISSAN fuel filler cap or exact
equivalent as a replacement. It has a built-in
safety valve needed for proper operation of

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


HANDBRAKE LEVER STEERING WHEEL

the fuel system and emission control system.


An incorrect cap can result in a serious mal-
function and possible injury.
CAUTION
If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away
with water to avoid paint damage.

NPA834Z NPA840Z

To apply: Pull the lever up j


1.
WARNING
To release: Pull the lever up slightly, push the but-
ton j
2 and lower completely. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
You could lose control of your vehicle and cause
Before driving, check that the brake warning light an accident.
goes out. For additional information, see Warn-
ing/indicator lights and audible reminders in the Release the lock lever as illustrated and adjust the
2. Instruments and controls section. steering wheel to the desired position (up or down,
forwards or backwards). Firmly push the lock lever
NOTE back into position to lock the steering wheel in place.
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven with-
out releasing the handbrake. See Audible
reminders in the 2. Instruments and controls
section.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SUN VISORS MIRRORS

INSIDE REAR-VIEW MIRROR AUTOMATIC ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE


MIRROR (where fitted)

NPA839Z

NPA862Z

CAUTION NPA829Z

Do not store the sun visor before returning it to j1 Night position


its original position. j2 Day position The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically
adjusts the reflection according to the intensity of
1. To block out glare from the front, move the main jA Front of the vehicle the following vehicles headlights.
sun visor downwards.
The night position j1 will reduce glare from the CAUTION
2. To block glare from the side, remove the main headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
sun visor from the centre mount and move it to Do not hang any object on the mirror or spray
the side. glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Doing so will
WARNING
reduce the sensitivity of the sensor, resulting in
Only use the night position j 1 when necessary, improper operation.
as it reduces rear-view clarity.
OUTSIDE REAR-VIEW MIRRORS

WARNING
Check the position of all mirrors before driv-
ing. Altering their position while driving could
distract your attention from the driving opera-
tion.
Objects viewed in the outside mirrors are
closer than they appear.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


NOTE
If the mirror becomes displaced from its adjusted
position, use the following procedure to return it
to the correct geared position:
1. Fold (or CLOSE j 1 ) the mirror electronically us-
ing the remote control switch.
2. Wait until the mirror emits a strong noise, this
confirms that the mirror has correctly engaged.
NPA863Z MPA0008Z
3. Fold out (or OPEN j 2 ) the mirror electronically
using the remote control switch.
Adjusting Remote control Folding Manual control 4. Adjust the mirror to the correct driving angle us-
A LHD models
j Fold the outside rear-view mirror by pushing it to- ing the remote control j 3.
wards the rear of the vehicle.
B RHD models
j
The outside rear-view mirror control will only oper-
ate when the ignition switch is in the Acc or ON
position.
Turn the control to the right j 1 or to the left j2 to
select the right or left outside rear-view mirror, then
adjust the mirror to the desired position by tilting the
control as illustrated j 3.

NPA864Z

Folding Remote control (where fitted)


Fold the outside rear-view mirror by pushing the
CLOSE side j 1 of the switch.
To return the mirror to its original position, push the
OPEN side j 2 of the switch.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


VANITY MIRROR

NPA842Z

Left hand drive

NPA910Z

Right hand drive

To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun


visor and lift up the cover.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


NOTE

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4 Display screen, heater and air conditioner,
and audio system

Rear-view monitor (where fitted)............................... 4-2 Compact Disc (CD) operation ............................ 4-27
How to read the displayed lines .......................... 4-2 AUX socket ........................................................ 4-29
Rear-view monitor setting.................................... 4-3 Bluetooth mobile phone feature........................ 4-29
Operating tips..................................................... 4-3 FM AM radio with CD player.................................... 4-30
Around view monitor (where fitted)........................... 4-4 Anti-theft system ................................................. 4-31
Operation ........................................................... 4-6 Audio main operation .......................................... 4-31
Guide lines ......................................................... 4-7 Radio operation .................................................. 4-32
Difference between predictive and actual SETUP button .................................................... 4-33
distances............................................................ 4-9 Compact Disc (CD) operation ............................ 4-35
How to adjust the screen view ............................ 4-11 AUX socket ........................................................ 4-36
Operating tips..................................................... 4-11 USB Memory operation (where fitted) ................. 4-37
Vents....................................................................... 4-12 iPod player operation (where fitted).................. 4-37
Side and centre vents ......................................... 4-12 Bluetooth operation.......................................... 4-39
High level vent (where fitted)............................... 4-12 NISSAN Connect (where fitted) ............................... 4-43
Heater and air conditioner operation ........................ 4-12 Steering wheel switch for audio control (where
Manual air conditioner......................................... 4-13 fitted)....................................................................... 4-43
Automatic air conditioner (where fitted) ............... 4-18 Main operation.................................................... 4-43
Audio system ........................................................... 4-21 Car phone or CB radio ............................................ 4-44
Audio operation precautions ............................... 4-21 Mobile phone integration for LW-MW-FM radio
Antenna.............................................................. 4-22 with CD player or 6 CD changer (Type A)................ 4-44
LW-MW-FM radio with CD player or 6 CD Bluetooth mobile phone feature........................ 4-44
changer ................................................................... 4-23 Mobile phone integration for FM AM radio with
Anti-theft system ................................................. 4-24 CD player ................................................................ 4-52
Audio main operation .......................................... 4-24 Bluetooth mobile phone feature........................ 4-52
Radio operation .................................................. 4-24 Hands-free telephone control .............................. 4-53
MENU button...................................................... 4-27 Steering wheel switches (where fitted)................ 4-55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


REAR-VIEW MONITOR
(where fitted)

because of the use of wide-angle lens. Ob- HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
jects in the rear-view monitor will appear visu- LINES
ally reversed compared to those viewed in the
inside and outside mirrors.
Make sure that the back door is securely
closed when reversing.
The area below the bumper and corner areas
of the bumper cannot be viewed on the rear-
view monitor because of its monitoring range
NAA1120
limitation.
Models with NISSAN Connect

A Camera
j
Do not put anything on the rear-view camera.
SAA0889Z
The rear-view camera is installed above the
When the gear or selector lever (AT or CVT) is number plate.
moved into the R (Reverse) position, the monitor
(NISSAN Connect display) shows the view from the
When washing the vehicle with high pressure WARNING
water, be sure not to spray it around the cam-
rear of the vehicle. era. Otherwise, water may enter the camera
Use the displayed lines as a reference. The
lines are highly affected by the number of oc-
The system is designed as an aid to the driver in unit causing possibly water condensation on cupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road con-
detecting large stationary objects. It is intended to the lens, a malfunction, a fire or an electric dition and road grade. Always check with your
help avoid damaging the vehicle when reversing. shock. eyes directly around the vehicle while revers-
However, the system will not detect small objects
below the bumper and may not detect objects close
Do not strike the camera. It is a precision in- ing.
strument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or
to the bumper or on the ground. cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric
The distance guide line and the vehicle width
line should be used as a reference only when
shock. the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The
WARNING
CAUTION distance viewed on the monitor is for refer-
The rear-view camera is a convenience but it
There is a transparent cover over the camera
ence only and may be different than the ac-
is not a substitute for proper reversing. Al- tual distance between the vehicle and dis-
ways turn your head and visually check that lens. Do not scratch the cover when cleaning dirt played objects.
the manoeuvre is safe to do so before revers- or snow from it.
ing. Always reverse slowly. When reversing the vehicle up a hill, objects
viewed in the monitor are further than they
The distance from the objects viewed in the appear. When reversing the vehicle down a
rear-view monitor differs from actual distance hill, objects viewed in the monitor are closer

4-2 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


than they appear. Use the inside mirror or verse), it may take some time until the screen Do not damage the transparent camera cover as
glance over your shoulder to properly judge changes. Objects on the screen may be dis- the NISSAN Connect display may be adversely
distances to other objects. torted until they are completely displayed. affected.
The lines which are displayed on the monitor, indi- When the temperature is extremely high or low, Do not use body wax on the transparent camera
cate the vehicles clearance and distance between the screen may not clearly display objects. This cover. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth damp-
the obstacle and the bumper j A. is not a malfunction. ened with mild detergent diluted with water.
Displayed lines indicate the distances between the When strong light directly enters the camera
obstacle and the bumper as follows: lens, objects may not be displayed clearly. This
is not a malfunction.
1 0.5 m (1.5 ft) red
j
2 1 m (3 ft) yellow
j Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light from
3 2 m (7 ft) green
j the bumper. This is not a malfunction.
4 3 m (10 ft) green
j The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
This is not a malfunction.
NOTE
The vehicle clearance lines are wider than the The colours of objects on the rear-view monitor
may differ somewhat from those of the actual
actual clearance.
object.
The lines are indicated as reference distances
Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
to the obstacle.
dark place or at night.
REAR-VIEW MONITOR SETTING If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the transparent
For details, see the separately provided NISSAN camera cover, the rear-view monitor may not
Connect Owners Manual. clearly display objects. Clean the transparent
camera cover.
OPERATING TIPS
When the gear (MT) or selector (AT or CVT)
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean
the transparent camera cover. This will cause
lever is shifted to R (Reverse), the NISSAN Con- discoloration. To clean the transparent camera
nect display automatically changes to the rear- cover, wipe with a cloth dampened with diluted
view monitor mode. mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry
When the gear (MT) or selector (AT or CVT) cloth.
lever is returned to a position other than R (Re-

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AROUND VIEW MONITOR (where fitted)

NOTE
At first operation, the corner lines are blinking
yellow for about 3 seconds. This is not a malfunc-
tion but a reminder to be cautious.
Available views:
Birds-eye View
The surrounding view of the vehicle.
Front-side View
The view around and ahead of the front passen-
gers side wheel.
Front view
The view to the front of the vehicle.
Rear view
The view to the rear of the vehicle.
The system is designed as an aid to the driver in
situations such as slot parking or parallel parking.

WARNING
NAA1241
The Around View Monitor is intended for day
time use. Do not use the system in bad light
1
j Front or rear view 7 <CAMERA> button
j conditions.
2 Warning message When you push the <CAMERA> button or shift the
j
gear selector lever into the R (Reverse) position
The Around View Monitor is a convenience
3
j Front or rear view indicator but it is not a substitute for proper vehicle
while the ignition switch is in the ON position, the operation because it has areas where objects
4
j Birds-eye view or front-side view Around View Monitor operates. The monitor displays cannot be viewed. Always visually check to be
various views of the position of the vehicle. sure that it is safe to move before operating
5
j Birds-eye view corner indication
the vehicle. Always operate the vehicle slowly.
6
j Birds-eye view corner lines

4-4 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Do not use the Around View Monitor with the Due to electromagnetic radiation a red cross
outside mirror in the stored position, and might appear in the monitor. This is normal.
make sure that the back door is securely Check surroundings for safety. Move the ve-
closed when operating the vehicle using the hicle away from the source of the interfer-
Around View Monitor. ence if possible. If the red cross does not dis-
appear contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified
The distance between objects viewed on the
workshop.
Around View Monitor differs from the actual
distance.
The cameras are installed above the front
grille, the outside mirrors and above the rear
number plate. Do not put anything on or cover
the cameras.
When washing the vehicle with high-pressure
water, be sure not to spray it around the cam-
eras. Otherwise, water may enter the camera
unit causing water condensation on the lens,
a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
Do not strike the cameras. They are precision
instruments. Doing so could cause a malfunc-
tion or cause damage resulting in a fire or an
electric shock.
NAA1234

In some areas the system will not detect ob-


jects. When in the front or the rear view dis-
play, an object below the bumper or on the
ground may not be detected j 1 . When in the
birds-eye view, a tall object near the seam of
the camera detecting areas will not appear in
the monitor j 2.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


OPERATION
The Around View Monitor display consists of the
front, left, right and rear screens. You can see a
combination of different views on the screens as
illustrated.
A : Audio or navigation screen
j
1 : Front view and birds-eye view
j
2 : Rear view and birds-eye view
j
3 : Front view and front side view
j
4 : Rear view and front side view
j
: Gear selector lever into R (Reverse)
: Gear selector lever out of R (Reverse)
: Push the <CAMERA> button
There are two ways to start using the Around View
monitor:
Select R (Reverse) gear
Push the <CAMERA> button
Selecting R (Reverse) gear
When the gear selector lever is shifted into the R
(Reverse) position Around View Monitor starts
automatically and the rear view and birds-eye
view are displayed j2.
The Around View Monitor screen turns off when
the gear selector lever is shifted out of the R
(Reverse) position j
A.
NAA1235

Example for Left-Hand Drive (LHD) models, for the Right-Hand Drive (RHD) models, the screen layout will be opposite.

4-6 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


In R (Reverse) gear rear view and birds-eye view eye view are greatly affected by the number
j2 are shown. The view on the screen on the of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road
passengers side switches to the front side view condition and road grade.
j4 when the <CAMERA> button is pushed.
If the tyres are replaced with different sized
Push the <CAMERA> button again to switch tyres, the predictive course line and the birds-
back to rear view and birds-eye view j
2. eye view may be displayed incorrectly.
Pushing the CAMERA button When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects
viewed in the monitor are further than they
When the <CAMERA> button is pushed, Around appear. When driving the vehicle down a hill,
View Monitor operates and the front view and objects viewed in the monitor are closer than SAA1840Z
birds-eye view are displayed j
1. they appear. Use the mirrors or actually look Front view

The front view and birds-eye view are displayed to properly judge distances to other objects.
j1 . The view on the screen on the passengers
side switches to the front-side view when the
The vehicle width and predictive course lines
are wider than the actual width and course.
<CAMERA> button is pushed j 3 . Pushing the
<CAMERA> button again turns the Around View
Monitor off.
To switch the drivers side screen between front
view and rear view use the gear selector lever.
GUIDE LINES
SAA1896Z

Rear view
WARNING
The distance guide line and the vehicle width Front and rear view
line should be used as a reference only when Guiding lines, which indicate the vehicle width and
the vehicle is on a paved, level surface. The distances to objects with reference to the vehicle
distance viewed on the monitor is for refer- body line jA , are displayed on the monitor.
ence only and may be different than the ac-
tual distance between the vehicle and dis- Distance guide lines:
played objects. Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
Use the displayed lines and the birds-eye Red line j
1 : approx. 0.5 m (1.5 ft)
view as a reference. The lines and the birds-

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Yellow line j
2 : approx. 1 m (3 ft) If predictive course lines are displayed incor- Birds-eye view
rectly visit a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
Green line j
3 : approx. 2 m (7 ft)
shop. The birds-eye view shows the overhead view of the
vehicle which helps to confirm the vehicle position.
Green line j
4 : approx. 3 m (10 ft)
The displayed lines on the rear view will ap-
5:
Vehicle width guide lines j pear slightly off to the right because the rear The vehicle icon j
1 shows the position of the ve-
view camera is not installed in the rear centre hicle.
Indicate the vehicle width when reversing.
of the vehicle. NOTE
6:
Predictive course lines j
NOTE The size of the vehicle icon on the birds-eye
Indicate the predictive course when operating the view may differ somewhat from the actual ve-
vehicle. The predictive course lines will be displayed When the monitor displays the front view and the
steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less hicle.
on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned.
The predictive course lines will move depending on from the neutral position, both the right and left The areas that the cameras cannot cover are indi-
how much the steering wheel is turned and will not predictive course lines j6 are displayed. When cated in black.
be displayed while the steering wheel is in the neu- the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or
At first operation, the corner lines j
2 on all four cor-
tral position. more, a line is displayed only on the opposite
side of the turn. ners of the vehicle icon are blinking yellow for about
The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle 3 seconds. The four corners j 3 of the vehicle are
speed is above 10 km/h (6 MPH). displayed in red.
NOTE
WARNING
Corner lines j2 blink (yellow) on all four corners
The distance between objects viewed in the of the vehicle icon as a reminder to be cautious.
rear view differs from actual distance because This is not a malfunction.
a wide-angle lens is used. Objects in the rear
view will appear visually opposite than when WARNING
viewed in the rear view and outside mirrors.
On a snow-covered or slippery road, there NAA1236 Objects in the birds-eye view will appear fur-
Birds-eye view
ther than the actual distance because the
may be a difference between the predictive birds-eye view is a pseudo view that is pro-
course line and the actual course line. cessed by combining the views from the cam-
If the battery is disconnected or becomes dis- eras on the outside mirrors, the front and the
charged, the predictive course lines may be rear of the vehicle.
displayed incorrectly. If this occurs visit a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

4-8 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Tall objects, such as a kerb or vehicle, may be Guiding lines:
misaligned or not displayed at the seam of
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate width
the views.
and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on the
Objects that are above the camera cannot be monitor.
displayed.
The front-of-vehicle line j
1 shows the front part of
The view for the birds-eye view may be mis- the vehicle.
aligned when the camera position alters.
The side-of-vehicle line j
2 shows the vehicle width
A line on the ground may be misaligned and is including the outside mirror.
not seen as being straight at the seam of the
The extensions j3 of both the front j
1 and side j
2
views. The misalignment will increase as the
lines are shown with a green dotted line.
line proceeds away from the vehicle.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The distance guide line and the vehicle width guide
line on the front and the rear view should be used as
a reference only when the vehicle is on a level, paved
surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for
reference only and may be different than the actual
distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

NAA1237

Frontside view, Left-Hand Drive (LHD) models* NAA1238

*: For the Right-Hand Drive (RHD) models, the


screen layout will be opposite. Moving to a steep uphill
Front-side view When moving the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide
CAUTION lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown
closer than the actual distance. For example, the
The actual distance to objects may differ from display shows 1 m (3 ft) to the place j A , but the
the distance shown. actual 1 m (3 ft) distance on the hill is the place j
B.
Note that any object on the hill is viewed in the moni-
tor further than it appears.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


NAA1239 SAA1923 SAA3575

Moving to a steep downhill Moving near a projecting object There may be a small visible distance between the
vehicle and the object in the birds-eye view j
B on
When moving the vehicle down a hill, the distance The predictive course lines j
A do not touch the the monitor. However, the actual distance may be
guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit smaller than displayed and the vehicle may hit the
shown further than the actual distance. For example, the object if it projects over the actual moving object.
the display shows 1 m (3 ft) to the place j A , but the course.
actual 1 m (3 ft) distance on the hill is the place jB.
Note that any object on the hill is viewed in the moni-
tor closer than it appears.

4-10 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN The colours of objects on the Around View Moni-
VIEW tor may differ somewhat from those of the actual
object.
To adjust the display brightness of the Around View
Monitor, use the settings described in the sepa- Objects on the monitor may not be clear and the
rately provided NISSAN Connect owners manual. colour of the object may differ in a dark location
or at night. This is not a malfunction.
Do not adjust the settings while the vehicle is mov-
ing. Make sure the handbrake is firmly applied. There may be differences in clearness between
each camera view of the birds-eye view.
OPERATING TIPS
If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera, the
The screen displayed on the Around View Moni- Around View Monitor may not display objects
tor will automatically return to the previous screen clearly. Clean the camera.
3 minutes after the <CAMERA> button has been
pushed while the gear selector lever is in a posi- CAUTION
tion other than the R (Reverse) position. Do not scratch lenses when cleaning the cam-
era.
The display of images on the screen may be
delayed after screens are switched. Objects in Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean
the Around View Monitor may be distorted mo- the camera. This will cause discolouration. To
mentarily until the Around View Monitor screen clean the camera, wipe with a cloth that has
is displayed completely. been dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent and then wipe with a dry cloth.
When the temperature is extremely high or low,

NAA1240
the screen may not display objects clearly. This Do not damage the camera because the monitor
is not a malfunction. screen may be adversely affected.
When strong light directly shines on the camera, Do not use wax on the camera window. Wipe off
Moving closer to a projecting object objects may not be displayed clearly. This is not any wax with a clean cloth that has been damp-
a malfunction. ened with a mild detergent diluted with water.
The position jC is shown further than the position
jB in the display. However, the position j
C is actu- Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
ally at the same distance as the position jA . The screen due to light reflections. This is not a mal-
vehicle may hit the object when moving toward the function.
position j
A if the object projects over the actual
moving course. The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
This is not a malfunction.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


VENTS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
OPERATION

SIDE AND CENTRE VENTS Whilst the engine is running, selecting airflow
WARNING to the front defogger or switching on the rear
Do not leave children or adults who would defogger will prevent the Stop/Start System
normally require the support of others alone automatically stopping the engine.
in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone The Stop/Start System will prevent unneces-
either. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a sary fuel consumption and exhaust emis-
closed vehicle could quickly become high sions. When the engine is stopped by the
enough to cause severe or possibly fatal inju- Stop/Start System heater and air conditioner
ries to people or animals. performance may be reduced. To keep full
Do not use the recirculation mode for long heater and air conditioner performance, re-
NAA945Z periods as it may cause the interior air to be- start the engine by pressing the Stop/Start
come stale and the windows to fog up. It is System OFF switch, or by turning the ignition
recommended that you use the outside air switch.
The direction of the air flow can be adjusted by j
A mode in cold weather to keep the windows
opening, jB closing or j C adjusting. For more information on the Stop/Start Sys-
clear. tem, see Stop/Start System (where fitted)
HIGH LEVEL VENT (where fitted) Do not adjust the positioning of the heating/ in the 5. Starting and driving section.
ventilation or air conditioning controls while
driving.
NOTE
Condensation forms inside the air condition-
ing unit when the air conditioner is running,
and is safely discharged underneath your ve-
hicle.
Traces of water on the ground are therefore
NAA1150 normal.
Models with Stop/Start System:
Press the button to switch the mild air flow from
the upper vent on or off. Use the upper vent on hot Whilst the engine is stopped by the Stop/Start
days to let cool air flow along the roof to the rear System, selecting airflow to the front defog-
passengers; and on cold days to improve the de- ger or switching on the rear defogger will
frosting or defogging of the windows with warm air. cause the engine the be automatically re-
started.

4-12 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Controls
Fan speed control dial m :

To switch the fan on or off and to control the fan


speed, turn the fan speed control dial clockwise to
increase the fan speed. To decrease the fan speed,
turn the fan speed control dial anticlockwise.
Temperature control dial:
Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired
air temperature from the vents and floor outlets.

NAA947

Manual air conditioner

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER 2. Instruments and controls section)


1 Temperature control dial
j 5 Airflow control dial
j
2 Air recirculation button
j 6 Air conditioner ON/OFF button
j
3 Fan speed control dial
j
4 Rear window defogger button
j
(For details, see Defogger switch in the

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Air flow control dial: A/C (Air Conditioner) button (where fitted): NOTE
Use this dial to manually select the air flow from the Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioner on When selecting the or position, turn
air outlets as described below. or off. When the air conditioner is on, the A/C indi- the temperature control dial to the desired
: Air flows from centre and side vents. cator light illuminates. position between the middle and the maxi-
: Air flows from centre, side vents and floor mum HOT (right) position.
Operation
outlets. 5. Press the A/C button (where fitted) to the ON
The heater and air conditioner operate when the
: Air flows mainly from floor outlets. position and the indicator light will come on.
engine is running. The air blower will operate even if
: Air flows from the defogger outlets and floor Switch this mode on for dehumidified heating or
the engine is turned off and the ignition switch is in
outlets. cooling.
the ON position.
: Air flows mainly from defogger outlets. NOTE
NOTE
Air recirculation button m :
The air conditioner cooling function operates only The air conditioner mode is used to cool and
dehumidify. For quick cooling when the out-
Outside air circulation when the engine is running and the fan is acti-
side temperature is high, select the air recir-
vated.
Press the air recirculation ( ) button to the culation mode position ( ). Be sure to re-
OFF position to draw outside air into the pas- 1. Press the air recirculation ( ) button to the turn to the outside air mode to avoid windows
senger compartment (the indicator light goes OFF position. from fogging-up and interior air from becom-
off). Use the OFF position for normal heating ing stale.
2. Turn the airflow control dial for:
ventilation, or air conditioner (where fitted) op- A visible mist may be seen coming from the
eration. Cooling: select the or position.
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is
Heating: select the or position. cooled rapidly this is not a malfunction.
Air recirculation
Press the air recirculation ( ) button to the Heating and defogging: select the po- For quick heating, press the air recirculation
ON position (the indicator light goes on). Use sition. ( ) button to the ON position. Be sure to
the ON position in situations such as: driving Ventilation: select the or position. return to the OFF position for normal heat-
on a dust raised road, avoiding traffic fumes or ing (no indicator light) in order to avoid win-
having maximum cooling from the air conditioner Windscreen defogging: select the po- dow fog and stale interior.
sition
(where fitted). To quickly defrost/defog the windscreen,
If the windows fog up, switch on the air condi- 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired turn:
tioning (where fitted). position.
1) The airflow control dial to position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired
position. 2) The fan speed control dial to speed posi-
tion 4.

4-14 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3) The temperature control dial to the maxi- NOTE
mum HOT (right) position.
The air recirculation mode should not be selected
Operating tips for either heating or defrosting.

In order to improve the heater operation, clear


the snow and ice from the wiper blade and air
inlet in front of the windscreen.
After parking in the sun, drive for two or three
minutes with the windows open to vent hot air
from the passenger compartment. Then close
the windows to allow the acceleration of the air
conditioners cooling operation.
Keep the windows closed while the air condi-
tioner is operating.
The air conditioning system should be operated
for about 10 minutes, at least once a month. This
helps prevent damage to the system due to lack
of lubrication.
If the coolant temperature gauge exceeds the
HOT position, turn the air conditioner off. For
additional information, see Engine overheat in
the 6. In case of emergency section.
If the engine coolant reaches an extremely high
temperature, the air conditioning system will au-
tomatically turn off. This may happen for example
if the engine runs at idle speed for a long time on
a hot day.
Quick reference charts
The following charts show the button, air intake and
dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
cooling or defrosting.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


mmm1
j
2
j
3
j
4
j
Controls
HEATING

Temperature control dial


Air recirculation button
Fan speed control dial

Air flow control dial


NAA1127

Settings
HOT
OFF
4
1
j
2
j
3
j
4
j
DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING
Controls
Temperature control dial
Air recirculation button
Fan speed control dial

Air flow control dial


NAA1128

Settings
HOT
OFF
4
1
j
2
j
3
j
Controls
COOLING

Temperature control dial

Air recirculation button

Fan speed control dial


NAA1129

Settings
COLD
ON (Max)
OFF (Normal)
4
m m
4
j Air flow control dial
5
j Air conditioner button
(where fitted)
OFF 5
j Air conditioner button
(where fitted)
ON m
Air conditioner button
5
j ON
(where fitted)

4-16 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Air conditioner filter (where fitted)
The air conditioning system is equipped with a filter
which collects dirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure
the air conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates effi-
ciently, replace the filter regularly. For filter replace-
ment, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop.
The filter should be replaced if the airflow is ex-
tremely reduced or when the windows fog up
easily during air conditioning system operation.
Servicing air conditioner
The air conditioning system (where fitted) in your
NISSAN vehicle is charged with an environmentally
friendly refrigerant.
NISSAN GREEN PROGRAM
This refrigerant will not harm the earths ozone
layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant are re-
quired when servicing your vehicles air conditioner.
Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause
severe damage to the air conditioning system. See
Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant
recommendations (where fitted) in the 9. Techni-
cal information section of this manual.
A NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop will be able
to service the air conditioning system.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8 DUAL zone control ON/OFF button
j
9 Rear window defogger button (and outside
j
mirror defogger (For details, see Defogger
switch in the 2. Instruments and controls
section)
10 Temperature control dial (Drivers side (RHD)/
j
Passengers side (LHD))
11 Temperature display
j
12 Windscreen defogger button
j
13 Air flow mode buttons
j

WARNING
Do not leave children or adults who would
normally require the support of others alone
in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone
either. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a
closed vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly fatal inju-
ries to people or animals.

NAA1152
Do not use the recirculation mode for long
periods as it may cause the interior air to be-
Automatic air conditioner (where fitted)
come stale and the windows to fog up. It is
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER 4 AUTO (climate control button)
j recommended that you use the outside air
mode in cold weather to keep the windows
(where fitted) 5 Air recirculation button
j clear.
j1 Temperature display 6 Fan speed control dial
j
Do not adjust the positioning of the heating/
j2 Temperature control dial (Drivers side (LHD)/ ON/OFF button (press) ventilation or air conditioning controls while
Passengers side (RHD)) driving.
7 High level vent button
j
3 Air conditioner ON/OFF button
j
For details, see Vents earlier in this section.

4-18 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


NOTE Adjust the temperature to about 22C (72F) for Airflow direction control buttons:
normal operation. : Air flows from centre and side vents.
The air conditioner cooling function operates
: Air flows from centre and side vents and
only when the engine is running, and the am- 3. Drivers side and passenger side temperatures
bient temperature is above -2C (28F). can be set independently using the individual floor outlets.
temperature control dial. When the passenger : Air flows mainly from floor outlets.
The air conditioner can be used to dehumidify
side temperature control dial is turned, the DUAL : Air flows from defogger and floor outlets.
when heating, or to reduce air temperature
indicator light will come on. To turn off the pas- : Air flows mainly from defogger outlets.
and dehumidify when cooling. This is possible
senger side temperature control, press the DUAL
in both auto or manual control mode as long
button.
as the fan speed is minimum (first bar).
NOTE
When the AUTO mode is selected, the tem-
perature of the passenger compartment will A visible mist may be seen coming from the
be maintained automatically. Air flow distribu- vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is
tion and fan speed will also be controlled au- cooled rapidly, this is not a malfunction.
tomatically.
It is not possible to use DUAL mode when
Controls windscreen defogger is selected.
NAA1179
NOTE Heating (AUTO mode):
Before any selection or change is made, press Use this mode for heating purposes only.
Windscreen defogger m (Manual mode):
the AUTO button to activate the heater and air 1. Press the A/C button to turn off the air condi-
conditioner system. tioner cooling function (A/C indicator light goes Use this mode for defogging the windscreen as fol-
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO off). lows:
mode): 2. Select the desired temperature with the tempera- 1. Press the button.
This mode may be used all year round. The system ture control dial.
works automatically to control the inside tempera- The system will automatically control the fan
ture, air flow distribution and fan speed after the Do not set the temperature at a lower level than speed. In cold conditions the fan will automati-
the one of the outside air temperature. Other- cally go to maximum speed. The outside air mode
preferred temperature is set manually.
wise the system may not work properly. ( ), the airflow mode ( ), and the air con-
1. Press the AUTO button (the indicator light will ditioner are activated automatically. Air flows
illuminate). This mode is not recommended if the windscreen
mainly from the defogger outlets.
fogs up.
2. Operate the drivers side temperature control dial
to set the desired temperature.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2. To switch off, press either the button to Air recirculation: To turn the system on/off:
return to the previous mode or the AUTO button Use this mode to recirculate interior air inside the Press the ON/OFF ( ) button to turn the system
for the auto climate control mode. passenger compartment in situations such as driv- on or off.
To quickly defrost/defog the windscreen, set the ing on a dust raised road, avoiding traffic fumes or
fan speed to the maximum position. having maximum cooling from the air conditioner.

As soon as possible after the windscreen has Press the < > button to recirculate interior air.
been cleared of ice or fog, press either the The indicator light illuminates and the air conditioner
windscreen defogger button or AUTO button. will automatically come on.

When the windscreen defogging mode is acti- When the air recirculation mode is switched off, out-
vated, the air conditioner will automatically switch side air is drawn into the passenger compartment.
on at outside temperatures [above -2C (28F)] Outside air circulation:
and the air recirculation mode will be switched
off. Use this mode to draw outside air into the passen- NAA967Z

ger compartment for normal heating, ventilation or


Outside air is drawn into the passenger com- air conditioner operation. The sensor j A (next to the tweeter speaker) helps
partment to improve the defogging performance.
Press the < > button to change the air intake the air conditioning system to maintain a constant
Heating and defogging (Manual mode): from the air recirculation to the outside air mode. cabin temperature. Do not put anything on or around
This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind- The indicator light ( ) turns off. this sensor and ensure that items nearby on the
screen. windscreen do not shade it.
The outside air is drawn inside the passenger com- Operating tips
partment when the button is pressed. Switch
on the air-conditioning to improve the defogging and
In order to improve the heater operation, clear
the snow and ice from the wiper blade and air
adjust the preferred fan speed and temperature. inlet in front of the windscreen.
Fan speed control m (Manual mode):
When the engine coolant temperature and out-
side air temperature are low, the airflow from the
Turn the fan speed control dial anticlockwise or
floor outlets may not operate for a maximum of
clockwise to adjust the fan speed.
150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction.
Press the AUTO button to change the fan speed to After the coolant temperature has warmed up,
automatic mode. the airflow from the floor outlets will operate nor-
mally.

4-20 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AUDIO SYSTEM

After parking in the sun, drive for two or three Servicing air conditioner WARNING
minutes with the windows open to vent hot air
from the passenger compartment. Then, close The air conditioning system in your NISSAN vehicle
Do not adjust the audio system while driving.
the windows. This will allow the acceleration of is charged with an environmentally friendly refriger-
the air conditioners cooling operation. ant. The audio system operates when the ignition switch
is in the Acc or ON position. If you want to listen to
NISSAN GREEN PROGRAM
Keep windows closed while the air conditioner is the radio or CD while the engine is not running, turn
operating. This refrigerant will not harm the earths ozone the ignition switch to the Acc position. Do not use
layer. for an extended period of time with the engine
The air conditioning system should be operated
stopped.
for about 10 minutes, at least once a month. This Special charging equipment and lubricant are re-
helps prevent damage to the system due to lack quired when servicing the NISSAN air conditioner. AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
of lubrication. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause
severe damage to the air conditioning system. See NOTE
If the coolant temperature gauge exceeds the
Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant
HOT position, turn the air conditioner off. For Models with NISSAN Connect system, see the
additional information, see Engine overheat in recommendations (where fitted) in the 9. Techni- audio operation precautions in the separately
the 6. In case of emergency section. cal information section. provided NISSAN Connect Owners Manual.
A NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop will be able
If the engine coolant reaches an extremely high
to service the air conditioning system.
Radio
temperature, the air conditioning system will au-
tomatically turn off. This may happen for example
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-
if the engine runs at idle speed for a long time on
ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-
a hot day.
ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
Air conditioner filter are normally caused by these external influences.
The air conditioning system is equipped with a filter Using a mobile phone in or near the vehicle may
which collects dirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure influence radio reception quality.
the air conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates effi-
ciently, replace the filter regularly. To replace the fil-
Use the antenna for the best reception.
ter, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. Compact Disc (CD) player
The filter should be replaced if the airflow is ex- During cold weather or rainy days, the player
tremely reduced or when the windows fog up may malfunction due to the humidity. If this
easily while operating the heater or air condition- occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or
ing system. ventilate the player completely.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


The player may skip while driving on rough ANTENNA
roads.
Occasionally, the CD player may not function
when the compartment temperature is ex-
tremely high. Decrease the temperature be-
fore use.
Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched,
covered with finger prints, or that have pin
holes may not work properly. NAA956Z

The following CDs may not work properly.


Copy control compact discs (CCCD) Removing the antenna
Recordable compact discs (CD-R) To remove the antenna, hold the lower part of the
antenna and turn it anticlockwise.
Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
CAUTION
Do not use the following CDs as they may
cause the CD player to malfunction. Make sure to remove the antenna before the ve-
hicle enters a garage with a low ceiling or an
8 cm (3.1 in) discs with an adaptor
automatic car wash otherwise the antenna can
CDs that are not round be damaged.
CDs with a paper label

4-22 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


LW-MW-FM RADIO WITH CD PLAYER OR 6 CD CHANGER

10 Telephone button
j
11 Radio mode: Manual tune buttons
j
CD mode: Fast forward (Cue)/Fast reverse
(Review) buttons
12 Phone disconnect/BACK button
j
13 Phone book button
j
14 CD player: Preset station buttons
j
6 CD changer:
Radio mode: Preset station buttons
CD mode: CD select buttons
15 ENTER (Confirmation) button
j
16 Volume control/Menu adjustment dial
j
17 CD player: Preset station buttons
j
6 CD changer:
Radio mode: Preset station buttons
CD mode: CD select buttons
NAA1215 18 Sound preference button
j
19 RPT (Repeat)/MIX (Random) button
j
Type A: CD player 4
j CD slot
20 Radio mode: Seek tuning buttons
j
Type B: 6 CD changer 5
j FMAM button
CD mode: Track Up/Down buttons
1
j Power ON/OFF button 6
j AUX button
21 TA (Traffic Announcement)/NEWS button
j
2
j CD player: MUTE button 7
j Display
2a
j 6 CD changer: CD Load button 8
j CD EJECT button
3
j CD play mode button 9
j MENU button

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM Mute button (where fitted) TREBLE control
The audio unit is uniquely matched to the vehicles Use this control to enhance or attenuate the treble.
NISSAN Anti Theft System (NATS) and therefore Press the button to mute the sound and
[MUTE] appears in the display. To cancel the mode, Turn the MENU/VOL dial clockwise or anticlockwise
cannot be transferred to any other vehicle. This unit
use any one of the following options: to adjust the treble settings.
can only be activated when the ignition switch for
NATS is in the Acc or ON position. Press the button again. BALANCE control
AUDIO MAIN OPERATION Turn the MENU/VOL dial. Use this control to adjust the balance of the volume
between the left and right speakers.
The audio unit operates when the ignition switch is Press the <CD>, <FMAM> or <AUX> button.
in Acc or ON position. Turn the MENU/VOL dial anticlockwise or clock-
m Sound button wise to adjust the left/right balance.
m Power ON/OFF button
Press the button to enter the sound menu. Each FADE (Fader) control
Press the button to switch on the audio unit. If time the button is pressed, the mode will change
Use this control to adjust the balance of the volume
the audio unit was switched off using the ignition as follows: between the front and rear (where fitted) speakers.
switch, it can also be switched on with the ignition
[BASS] [TREBLE] [BALANCE] [FADE] Turn the MENU/VOL dial anticlockwise or clock-
switch. The mode (radio or CD) that was playing
[EQ] [BASS] wise to adjust the front/rear balance.
immediately before the unit was switched off will
resume playing and the volume will be set to the pre- When the desired mode appears in the display, turn
the MENU/VOL dial clockwise or anticlockwise to
EQ (Equalizer)
vious volume level.
adjust the settings. When the configuration is com- Use this control to change the preset sound mode.
The audio unit can be switched off either by press-
plete, press the <ENTER> button repeatedly or the
ing the button or by turning the ignition switch to Turn the MENU/VOL dial in the clockwise or anti-
<BACK> button once until the sound menu screen
the OFF or LOCK position. clockwise direction and the mode will change as fol-
is exited or wait at least 5 seconds without pressing
lows:
m Volume level control any buttons.
[OFF] [ENHANCE] [ACOUSTIC] [LIVE]
BASS control [OFF]
Turn the MENU/VOL dial in the clockwise or anti-
clockwise direction to adjust the volume level. Use this control to enhance or attenuate bass re-
sponse sound.
RADIO OPERATION
The audio unit is equipped with a speed control vol- When the (Power) button is pressed, the audio
ume function, this means that the audio unit auto- Turn the MENU/VOL dial clockwise or anticlockwise
unit will switch on with the last received radio sta-
matically adjusts the volume level in relation to ve- to adjust the bass settings.
tion, if the audio unit was previously switched off in
hicle speed. For details, see MENU button later in radio mode.
this section.

4-24 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FMAM Band select button The frequency increases or decreases in steps of If the battery is disconnected, or if the fuse blows,
100 kHz on the FM band, 9kHz on the MW band, the radio memory will be erased. In that case, reset
Press the <FMAM> button to change the reception and 3 kHz on the LW band. the desired stations after battery connection or fuse
wave band as follows: replacement.
If the or button is held down with a long
FM1 FM 2 FM T MW LW FM1 press, the frequency will continuously increase or Radio data system (RDS) operation
When <FMAM> button is pressed while the igni- decrease until the button is released.
The RDS is a system through which encoded digital
tion switch is in the Acc or ON position, the radio
will come on at the last received radio station. If the
SEEK tuning buttons information is transmitted by FM radio station in ad-
dition to the normal FM-radio broadcasting. The
CD is already playing, pressing the <FMAM> but-
Pressing briefly on the or button starts the RDS provides information services such as station
ton will switch off the CD play mode and the last
tuning mode. The radio tuner seeks from low to high name, traffic information and news.
received radio station will be selected.
or high to low frequencies and stops at the next
NOTE
FM Auto store broadcasting station. During seek mode, the audio
output is muted. If no broadcasting station can be In some countries or regions, some of these ser-
When the <FMAM> button is pressed for more
found within the complete band cycle, it will return vices may not be available.
than 1.5 seconds and the six strongest stations are
to the initial frequency.
stored in the preset (1 to 6) of the FM T band. Dur- Alternative Frequency (AF) mode:
ing the search, a notification message [AU- If the or button is held down with a long The AF mode operates in the FM (radio) mode.
TOSTORE] appears in the display and the sound is press, the seek mode will continuously increase or
muted until the operation is complete. Once com- decrease until the button is released. When the but- The AF mode operates both in the FM (radio)
pleted, the radio selects preset 1. ton is released, the seek mode will seek the next and CD mode (if FM was previously selected in
broadcasting station. the radio mode).
Manual tuning buttons
Preset station buttons j
1j2j
3j4j
5j6 When AF mode has been set to the ON posi-
tion in the user set up menu mode, the [AF] indi-
WARNING Pressing a preset button for less than 2 seconds will cator comes on. For activation or deactivation
select the stored radio station. details, see MENU button later in this section.
The radio should not be tuned while driving in
order for full attention to be given to the driving Pressing a preset button for more than 2 seconds The AF function compares signal strengths and se-
operation. will cause the station currently being received to be lects the station with the optimum reception condi-
stored against that preset button. tions for the currently tuned-in station.
Press the or button repeatedly to in- Eighteen stations can be stored in the FM band.
crease or decrease the frequency. (Six each for FM1, FM2 and FMT)
Six stations can be set for both the MW and LW
bands.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RDS functions TA Traffic announcement NOTE
Programme Service (PS) function (station name This function operates in both FM (radio) and CD TA mode operates regardless of whether the AF
display function): mode. mode is on or off.
When an RDS station is tuned in with seek or manual Pressing the <TA NEWS> button selects the TA NEWS mode
tuning, the RDS data is received and the PS name mode. The TA indicator is displayed while TA
is displayed. When the NEWS mode is activated and the radio
mode is on.
receives a NEWS code from a FM broadcasting
Emergency broadcast interrupt function
(ALARM INTERRUPTION - EBU SPEC FOR
When the <TA NEWS> button is pressed again. station, the playing mode will be interrupted. Once
The mode will be switched off and the TA indica- the news broadcast has finished, the audio unit will
INFO):
tor will disappear from the display. return to the previous source. During the interrup-
When the radio receives PTY code 31 (an emer- tion, NEWS and the broadcasting station name will
gency broadcast code), the sound is interrupted, If the TA mode is not activated, a T icon will
be displayed.
the emergency broadcast is heard, and [ALARM] is appear in the display when the currently received
displayed. The volume level at this time is the same radio station is capable of broadcasting traffic To enable or disable the NEWS mode, press the
as that for traffic announcements. Once the emer- announcements. Pressing the <TA NEWS> but- <TA NEWS> button for more than 2 seconds. When
gency broadcast is finished, the unit immediately ton will activate TA mode and the indicator will the NEWS mode is enabled, the NEWS icon will be
returns to the previous source. change from T to TA. displayed.

REG (Regional) mode: Traffic announcement interrupt function: 1. NEWS standby mode

Some local radio stations are linked according to When a traffic announcement is received, the an- The NEWS standby mode can be activated while
region because they only offer limited coverage due nouncement is tuned in. in FM or CD mode.
a limited number of transmitters. If the signal from
one station of these stations becomes weak while
Once the traffic announcement has finished, the unit Pressing the TA NEWS button for more than 2
returns to the source that was active before the traf- seconds, the NEWS standby mode will switch
driving, RDS mode will switch to another local sta- fic announcement started. The volume returns to the off and the NEWS icon will disappear from the
tion in the region with a stronger signal. previous level. display.
When the REG mode is activated in the FM band If the <TA NEWS> button is pressed during a traffic 2. NEWS interruption mode
and the radio receiver is tuned to a local radio sta- announcement, the traffic announcement interrupt
tion, it will keep receiving this radio station without mode is cancelled. The TA mode returns to the Pressing the <TA NEWS> button for more than
switching to another local station. For activation or standby mode and the audio unit returns to the pre- 2 seconds, the NEWS standby mode will switch
deactivation details, see MENU button later in this vious source. off and the NEWS icon will disappear from the
section. display.

4-26 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


When the <CD> or <AUX> button is pressed To change the display language, briefly press on ing more rapidly with vehicle speed. Press the
during a NEWS interruption, the NEWS standby the <ENTER> button when LANGUAGE <ENTER> button again to save the setting.
mode remains active. appears in the display then turn the MENU/VOL
dial clockwise or anticlockwise to select the ap- When [BEEP] appears in the display, briefly
However, if the <FMAM> button is pressed and press the <ENTER> button and then turn the
propriate language setting.
the radio wave band changes to the MW or LW, MENU/VOL dial clockwise or anticlockwise to
then the NEWS standby mode will be switched [ENGLISH] [DUTCH] [FRENCH] switch the beep sound on or off. When this item
off. [SPANISH] [GERMAN] [ITALIAN] is turned on, you will hear a beep sound when
[PORTUGUESE] [ENGLISH] you use a button. Press the <ENTER> button
MENU BUTTON again to save the setting.
After selecting the desired language, press the
To configure Alternative Frequency (AF), Regional <ENTER> button to save the setting. After the desired levels have been set, press either
(REG) and Language settings, perform the follow- the <MENU> button, the <BACK> button, or wait
ing procedure: After the desired levels have been set, press either
for 10 seconds without pressing any buttons to exit
the <MENU> button for at least 1.5 seconds, the
1) Press and hold the <MENU> button for at least the menu screen.
<BACK> button, or wait for 5 seconds without
1.5 seconds. pressing any buttons to exit the menu screen. COMPACT DISC (CD) OPERATION
2) Turn the MENU/VOL dial clockwise or anticlock- To configure the [SPEED VOL] (Volume) and Turn the ignition switch to the Acc or ON position,
wise, the display message will appear in the fol- [BEEP] settings, perform the following procedure: press the <CD> button and the CD mode will start
lowing order:
1) Briefly press the <MENU> button. to play the CD.
[AF] [REG] [LANGUAGE] [AF]
2) Turn the MENU/VOL dial clockwise or anticlock- When the <CD> button is pressed and the radio
To activate or deactivate the AF and REG mode, wise, the display message will appear in the fol- mode or AUX mode is already operating, it will auto-
briefly press the <ENTER> button when [AF] or lowing order: matically turn off and the CD mode will start.
[REG] appears in the display and turn the MENU/
[PHONE SETUP] [SPEED VOL] [BEEP] However, if the CD is not loaded, then a notification
VOL dial clockwise or anticlockwise to switch
[PHONE SETUP] message will be displayed and the audio unit re-
between the on or off position. After selection,
mains in radio mode or AUX mode.
press the <ENTER> button to save the settings.
When [SPEED VOL] is displayed, briefly press
CAUTION
When the AF mode is enabled, the audio unit the <ENTER> button then turn the MENU/VOL
will automatically re-tune to a stronger fre- dial clockwise or anticlockwise to adjust the level Do not force the CD into the slot. This could
quency if the radio signal becomes weak. of the volume. damage the player.
When the REG mode is enabled, the audio Adjusting the setting to 0 (zero) turns off the Do not use 8 cm (3.1 in) discs.
unit will maintain and hold the station which is speed volume feature. Increasing the speed vol-
broadcasting local (regional) programmes. ume setting results in the audio volume increas-

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CD insert (CD player) After loading the disc, the track number and the Repeat/MIX button
occupied slot number will appear in the display.
Insert the CD into the slot with the label side facing
up. The CD will be guided automatically into the slot If the CD is not loaded within 10 seconds, the CD Pressing the button repeatedly will change the
and will start playing. After loading the CD, the track changer will start to play the last CD or return to the play mode as follows:
information will be displayed. last received radio station. CD player:
If the radio is already operating, it will be automati- To insert 6 CDs into the CD changer in succession, [RPT TRACK] [MIX DISC] [RPT ALL] [RPT
cally turned off and the CD player will start playing. press and hold the button for more than 1.5 TRACK]
seconds. [RPT TRACK]: The current track will be played
CD Play button
CD select buttons j
1j2j
3j4j
5j6 (6 continuously.
CD Changer) [MIX DISC]: All the tracks will be played in a
Press the <CD> button to start playing the loaded
random order.
CD. Playing starts from the track that was being
To change to another CD stored in the CD changer, [RPT ALL]: All the tracks will be played in
played when the CD play mode was switched off.
press the corresponding CD select button. When a sequential order.
CD Load button (6 CD CD is selected, it will start to play from the first
track. 6 CD changer:
Changer)
Fast Forward (Cue), [RPT TRACK] [RPT DISC] [MIX DISC]
To insert a CD into the CD changer proceed as fol- [MIX ALL] [RPT ALL] [RPT TRACK]
lows: Fast reverse (Review)
[RPT The current track will be played
1) Press the button for less than 1.5 seconds buttons
TRACK]: continuously.
2) Select an unoccupied slot by pressing the corre- When the (Cue) or (Review) button is [RPT The currently played CD will be
sponding CD select button. If no slot is selected, pressed continuously, the track will be played at DISC]: played repeatedly.
the CD changer will select the first available slot high speed. When the button is released, the CD [MIX All the tracks on the currently
after 5 seconds. If the selected slot is already will return to normal playing speed. DISC]: played CD will be played in a
occupied with a CD then the display will show a Track up/down buttons random order.
notification message that this slot is not avail- [MIX ALL]: All the tracks on all of the CDs will
able. Pressing the or button once will cause the be played in a random order.
CD to skip forward or backward to the beginning of [RPT ALL]: All the tracks on all the CDs will be
3) Insert the CD into the slot with the CD label side
the next track. Press the or button to skip played continuously in sequential
facing up when the display shows [LOAD CD].
through the CD tracks. The CD will skip the number order.
The CD will be guided automatically into the slot
and will start playing. of times the button is pressed.

4-28 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CD eject button Ejecting CD (with ignition switch in OFF or AUX SOCKET
LOCK):
CD player:
When the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK
Press the eject ( ) button and the CD will be position it is possible to eject the currently played
ejected. CD. However the audio unit will not be activated.
6 CD changer: CD player:
1. A CD can be ejected by: Press the eject ( ) button and the CD will be
Pressing the eject ( ) button (the currently ejected.
played CD will be ejected). 6 CD changer:
Pressing a CD select button followed by the
Press the eject ( ) button less than 1.5 sec-
NAA1092

eject ( ) button. onds and the CD will be ejected.


Pressing the eject ( ) button followed by a
To eject all CDs in sequential order, keep the Open the lid and connect the lead with the jack of a
CD select button. eject ( ) button pressed for longer than 1.5 compatible player (e.g. MP3 player) to the socket
seconds. The CD changer starts to eject from jA.
2. After pressing the eject ( ) button, a notifica-
tion message appears in the display. the current or last used CD onwards. After re- Press the <AUX> button for the AUX mode.
moving an ejected CD, the next one comes out.
3. When the CD slot door opens, the CD is ejected BLUETOOTH MOBILE PHONE
and the CD can now be removed. NOTE FEATURE
4. If necessary, insert another CD into the respec- When the CD is ejected and not removed This system offers a hands-free facility for your mo-
tive CD slot or wait to let the system close the within 15 seconds, it will automatically retract bile telephone with Bluetooth to enhance driving
CD slot door. into the slot to protect it from damage. comfort.
To eject all the discs sequentially, press and hold If an error message appears in the display, For details, see Mobile phone integration for LW-
the eject ( ) button for longer than 1.5 seconds. press the eject ( ) button to eject the faulty MW-FM radio with CD player or 6 CD changer
The CD changer will start to eject from the current CD and insert another CD or check if the (Type A) later in this section.
or last used CD. After removing an ejected CD, the ejected CD is inserted upside down.
next CD will be ejected.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FM AM RADIO WITH CD PLAYER

Audio unit mode: Display (DISP) button


10. Radio mode: Preset button
CD, AUX or Phone mode: Quick search but-
ton
11. CD slot
12. CD eject button
13. Auxiliary (AUX) source button
14. Telephone button
15. Radio mode: TUNE dial
Audio unit mode: MENU dial
Confirmation (ENTER) button
16. Back button
17. SETUP button
18. Fast Forward (Cue) play/Forward Track but-
ton
19. Fast Reverse (Review) play/Reverse Track
button
NAA1216
20. Traffic announcement (TA) button

1. Power ONOFF button/Volume control (VOL) CD mode: Repeat (RPT) button


knob
6. Radio mode: Preset button
2. CD play mode button
CD mode: MIX button
3. FMAM button
7. Display
4. Mute button (where fitted) or (Day/Night)
8. Radio mode: Preset buttons
button (where fitted)
9. Radio mode: Preset button
5. Radio mode: Preset button

4-30 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM For example, if the radio code is 5169: for the
first digit, 5, press the preset button j
1 five
Use of a 4-digit radio PIN (Personal Identification times.
Number) code, known only to the vehicle owner,
effectively reduces the possibility of the audio unit 4. The second, third, and fourth digits of the radio
being stolen. Without the PIN code the audio unit code must be entered, in the same way, only
cannot be activated. now using preset buttons j2,j 3 , and j 4.
If force is used to try and remove the audio unit, the 2 once, j
For example, press j 3 six times, and
Anti-theft system activates and the audio unit is j4 nine times.
locked. The only way to unlock the audio unit is to 5. Press with a long press preset button <j6 > to
NAA1217
enter the radio code number shown on an identifica- confirm the code. If you entered the code cor-
tion card supplied with the vehicle documentation. rectly the unit will switch on.
NOTE Unlocking the unit
6. If the code is entered incorrectly a notification
If the battery supply to the vehicle is interrupted, the message [INCORRECT PIN] and the number of
The 4 digit radio code is shown on a card that
audio unit will lock. attempts left [REMAINING TRIES: XX] will be
you received with your vehicle documenta-
tion. When the power is restored and the unit switched shown.
on, the display will show [Radio Code:] and it will be After reading the message, press the <ENTER>
Record the 4 digit radio code on the Security
unlocked when the codes have been entered cor- button to return to the entry screen and enter the
information page at the end of this manual.
Remove the security page and keep it in a rectly. correct radio code.
safe, not in the vehicle. Unlocking procedure: If the wrong code is entered after the third
Contact a NISSAN dealer if you do lose the 4 Read this section very carefully. It is important attempt, the audio unit will lock for 60 min-
digit radio code of the audio unit. that the instructions are followed precisely. utes. The display will show a count down timer
from 60 to 0 (minutes). After 60 minutes enter
To unlock the audio unit, proceed as follows: the correct radio code.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the Acc or ON posi- If the wrong code is entered after eight sets
tion. of three entries, the audio unit will lock per-
2. [Radio Code:] is displayed along with four nu- manently. Contact a NISSAN dealer for fur-
merical zero digits. ther details.
3. Press preset button j1 the number of times cor- AUDIO MAIN OPERATION
responding with the first digit of the radio code.
The audio unit operates when the ignition switch is
in Acc or ON position.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


m Power ON/OFF button Day/Night button (where fitted) sound is muted until the operation is complete. Once
completed, the radio selects preset button j 1.
Press the button to switch on the audio unit. If The illumination brightness level is linked to the Manual tuning
the audio unit was switched off using the ignition headlight switch. When the headlights are switched
switch, it can also be switched on with the ignition ON the brightness is dimmed automatically. Press
When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency
switch. The source that was playing immediately the button to toggle illumination brightness levels
manually, turn the <TUNE/MENU> dial until the de-
before the unit was switched off will resume playing between daytime setting and nighttime setting inde-
sired station is tuned in.
and the volume will be set to the previous volume pendent of headlamp status.
level. The frequency increases or decreases in steps of
RADIO OPERATION 100 kHz on the FM band, and 9 kHz on the AM
The audio unit can be switched off by pressing ,
When the (power ON/OFF) button is pressed, band.
or by turning the ignition switch to the OFF or
LOCK position. the audio unit will switch on with the last received
radio station, if the audio unit was previously WARNING
m Volume (VOL) level control switched off in radio mode.
The radio should not be tuned while driving in
Turn the <VOL> dial clockwise or anticlockwise to
Radio band select order for full attention to be given to the driving
buttons operation.
adjust the volume level.
The audio unit is equipped with a speed control vol- Press the <FMAM> button to change the reception SEEK tuning buttons
ume function, this means that the audio system au- wave band as follows:
Pressing the < > or < > button starts the tun-
tomatically adjusts the volume level in relation to FM1 FM2 FMT AM FM1 ing mode. The radio tuner seeks from low to high or
vehicle speed. For details, see SPD VOL (Speed
volume) control later in this section. When <FMAM> button is pressed, the radio will high to low frequencies and stops at the next broad-
come on at the last received radio station. If the CD casting station. During seek mode, the audio output
Mute button (where fitted) or AUX source mode is already playing, pressing is muted. If no broadcasting station can be found
the <FMAM> button will switch off the playing within the complete band cycle, it will return to the
Press the button to mute the sound and [MUTE] source mode and the last received radio station will initial frequency.
appears in the display. To cancel the mode, use any be selected.
of the following options:
Preset station buttons j
1j2j
3j4j
5j6
FM Auto store Pressing a preset button for less than 2 seconds will
Press again.
When the <FMAM> button is pressed for more select the stored radio station.
Turn the <VOL> dial. than 1.5 seconds the six stations with the strongest
Pressing a preset button for more than 2 seconds
Press the <CD>, <FMAM>, or <AUX> button. signals are stored in the preset (1 to 6) buttons of
will cause the station currently being received to be
the FMT band. During the search, a notification mes-
stored against that preset button.
sage [AUTOSTORE] appears in the display and the

4-32 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Eighteen stations can be stored in the FM band. RDS functions SETUP BUTTON
(Six each for FM1, FM2 and FMT)
Programme Service (PS) function (station name To configure Audio, Clock, Bluetooth, Language or
Six stations can be set for the AM band. display function): Scroll direction settings, perform the following pro-
If the battery is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, When an RDS station is tuned in with seek or manual cedure:
the radio memory will be erased. In that case, reset tuning, the RDS data is received and the PS name 1. Press the <SETUP> button.
the desired stations after battery connection or fuse is displayed.
replacement. 2. Turn the <TUNE/MENU> dial clockwise or anti-
TA Traffic announcement clockwise, the display will appear in the following
Radio data system (RDS) operation This function operates in FM (Radio), CD or AUX order:
The RDS is a system through which encoded digital mode. [Audio] [Clock] [Bluetooth] [Language]
information is transmitted by FM radio stations in [Scroll Direction]
addition to the normal FM radio broadcasting. The
Pressing the <TA> button selects the TA mode.
The TA indicator is displayed while TA mode is After the desired levels have been set, press either
RDS provides information services such as station on. the (Back) button repeatedly, the <SETUP>
name, traffic information, or news.
button, or wait for 8 seconds without pressing any
NOTE
When <TA> is pressed again. The mode will be
buttons to exit the menu screen.
switched off and the TA indicator will disappear
In some countries or regions, some of these ser- from the display. Display brightness (Day/Night mode)
vices may not be available. Traffic announcement interrupt function: Press the <SETUP> button with a long press to
Alternative Frequency (AF) mode: When a traffic announcement is received, the an- switch the display brightness between the daytime
The AF mode operates in the FM (radio) mode. nouncement is tuned in and the display shows a and nighttime mode.
notification message with the radio station name e.g.
The AF mode operates in the FM (radio), AUX or [TA: Radio 1].
Audio adjustments
CD mode (if FM was previously selected in the Press the <SETUP> button to enter the setup menu
radio mode). Once the traffic announcement has finished, the unit
screen then select [Audio].
returns to the source that was active before the traf-
The AF function compares signal strengths and fic announcement started. Each time the <ENTER> button is pressed, the mode
selects the station with the optimum reception will change as follows:
conditions for the currently tuned-in station. If <TA> is pressed during a traffic announcement,
the traffic announcement interrupt mode is can- [Bass] [Treble] [Balance] [Fade] [AUX
celled. The TA mode returns to the standby mode VOL] [SPD VOL] setup menu screen [Audio]
and the audio unit returns to the previous source. [Bass]

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Bass control: AUX VOL (Auxiliary volume) control: 4. Press <ENTER> to finish the clock adjustment.
Use this control to enhance or attenuate bass re- Use this control to adjust the volume output from the [On/Off]:
sponse sound. auxiliary source.
Set the clock display between on or off when the
Turn the <TUNE/MENU> dial clockwise or anti- Turn the <TUNE/MENU> dial anticlockwise or audio unit is turned off.
clockwise to adjust the bass settings then press clockwise to select [LO], [MID], or [HI] mode then
If set in the [ON] position, the clock will be dis-
<ENTER> to confirm. press <ENTER> to confirm.
played when the audio unit is turned off either by
Treble control: SPD VOL (Speed volume) control: pressing the button or when the ignition switch
Use this control to enhance or attenuate the treble. This mode controls the volume output from the is placed in the OFF position.
speakers automatically in relation to vehicle speed. [Clock Format):
Turn the <TUNE/MENU> dial clockwise or anti-
clockwise to adjust the treble settings then press When [SPD VOL] is displayed, turn the <TUNE/ Set the clock display between 24-hour mode and
<ENTER> to confirm. MENU> dial clockwise or anticlockwise to adjust 12-hour clock mode.
the volume level.
Balance control: Bluetooth
Use this control to adjust the balance of the volume Adjusting the setting to 0 (zero) turns off the speed
For activation or deactivation details, see Blue-
between the left and right speakers. volume feature. Increasing the speed volume setting
tooth operation later in this section.
results in the audio volume increasing more rapidly
Turn the <TUNE/MENU> dial anticlockwise or with vehicle speed. Once chosen, press <ENTER> Language
clockwise to adjust the left/right balance then press to save the setting.
<ENTER> to confirm. Select the appropriate language and press the
Clock setting <ENTER> button. Upon completion, the screen will
Fade (Fader) control: automatically adapt the language setting.
The [Clock] set up screen will appear when select-
Use this control to adjust the balance of the volume
between the front and rear (where fitted) speakers.
ing the [Clock] item from the set up menu. [French]

Turn the <TUNE/MENU> dial anticlockwise or


[Set Time]: [English]
clockwise to adjust the front/rear balance then press Select [Set Time] then adjust the clock as follows: [German]
<ENTER> to confirm. 1. The hour display will start flashing. Turn the [Spanish]
<TUNE/MENU> dial to adjust the hour.
[Portuguese]
2. Press the <ENTER> button. The minute display
will start flashing. [Italian]

3. Turn the <TUNE/MENU> dial to adjust the [Dutch]


minute. [Turkish]

4-34 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[Russian] CD insert (CD player) Quick search:
Scroll direction Insert the CD disc into the slot with the label side In the list view mode, quick search can be per-
facing up. The disc will be guided automatically into formed to find a track from the list.
Sets the scroll direction of the <TUNE/MENU> dial.
the slot and will start playing. After loading the disc, Push the <A-Z > j 6 button then turn the <TUNE/
For example, to change the way in which you turn
track information will be displayed. MENU> dial for the first alphabetic/numerical letter
the dial (anticlockwise or clockwise) in order to scroll
up or down a list. NOTE of the track title then press <ENTER>. When found,
a list of the available tracks will be displayed. Select,
COMPACT DISC (CD) OPERATION The CD player accepts normal audio CD or and press <ENTER> to play the preferred track.
CD recorded with MP3/WMA files.
The CD player can play a music CD or an encoded Fast Forward (Cue), Fast
MP3/WMA CD and while listening to those CDs Inserting a CD recorded with MP3/WMA files, Reverse (Review) buttons:
certain text might be able to be displayed (when CD the audio unit will automatically detect and When the (Cue) or (Review) button is
encoded with text is being used). [MP3CD] will be indicated. pressed continuously, the track will be played at
Press the <CD> button and the CD (if loaded) will An error notification message will be high speed. When the button is released, the track
start to play. displayed when inserting a wrong disc type will be played at normal playing speed.
When <CD> is pressed and the radio or AUX source (e.g. DVD), or the player cannot read the CD Track up/down buttons:
mode is already operating, it will automatically turn disc. Eject the disc and insert another disc.
off the playing source and the CD play mode will CD button Pressing the or button once, the track will
start. be skipped forward to the next track or backward to
Press the <CD> button to start playing the loaded the beginning of the current played track. Press the
However, if the CD disc is not loaded, then a notifi- or button more than once to skip through
cation message will be displayed and the audio unit CD. Playing starts from the track that was being
played when the CD play mode was switched off. the tracks.
remains in radio or AUX source mode.
Folder browsing:
CAUTION Audio main operation
If the recorded media contains folders with music
Do not force the CD into the slot. This could List view: files, pressing the or button will play in
damage the player. While the track is being played, press either the sequence the tracks of each folder.
<ENTER> or button to display the available
Do not use 8 cm (3.1 in) discs.
tracks in a listed view mode. To select a track from
To select a preferred folder:
the list, or a track to start listening from, turn the 1. Press the <ENTER> or button and a list of
<TUNE/MENU> dial then press <ENTER>. tracks in the current folder is displayed.
2. Press the button.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3. Turn the <TUNE/MENU> dial for the preferred Track time Artist name Track title Album AUX SOCKET
folder. title Track time
4. Press <ENTER> to access the folder. Press CD with MP3/WMA:
<ENTER> again to start playing the first track or
Track time Artist name Album title Folder
turn the <TUNE/MENU> dial, and press
name Track time
<ENTER> to select another track.
Track details:
If the current selected folder contains sub folders,
press <ENTER>, a new screen with a list of sub A long press on the j5 button will turn the dis-
folders will be displayed. Turn the <TUNE/MENU> play into a detailed overview and after a few sec-
dial for the sub folder then press <ENTER> to se- onds it returns to the main display, or press 5
j
lect. Select the [Root] folder item when songs are briefly. NAA1214

recorded additionally in the root folder. CD eject button


To return to the previous folder screen, press . A AUX
j
CD player:
Repeat button: B USB (where fitted)
j
Press the (eject) button and the CD will be
Push the j1 button and the current track will
ejected. Audio main operation
be played continuously. Ejecting CD (with ignition switch in OFF or Open the lid and connect the lead with the jack of a
LOCK): compatible player (e.g. MP3 player) to the socket
button:
When the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK jA.
Push the 2 button and all the tracks will be
j position it is possible to eject the currently played Press the <AUX> button for the AUX mode.
played in a random order. CD. However the audio unit will not be activated.
m button: Press the button and the CD will be ejected.
NOTE
While a CD with recorded music information tags
(CD-text/ID3text tags) is being played, the title of When the CD is ejected and not removed
the played track is displayed. If the title information within 8 seconds, it will automatically retract
is not provided then [Track] is displayed. into the slot to protect it from damage.
When the j5 button is pressed repeatedly, If an error message appears in the display,
further information about the track can be displayed press to eject the faulty CD and insert an-
along with the track title as follows: other CD or check if the ejected CD is in-
serted upside down.
CD:

4-36 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


USB MEMORY OPERATION Audio main operation iPod PLAYER OPERATION
(where fitted) The following operations are identical to the audio (where fitted)
main operation of the Compact Disc (CD) opera-
tion. For details, see Compact Disc (CD)
operation earlier in this section.
List view
Quick search
,
MIX (Random play)
NAA1213
RPT (Repeat track) NAA1212

Folder browsing
Connecting USB memory m button j
5 Connecting iPod
Open the console lid and connect a USB memory Open the console lid and connect the iPod cable to
stick as illustrated. The display will show a notifica- While a track with recorded music information tags the USB connector. The battery of the iPod will be
tion message, for a few seconds, that it is reading (ID3tags) is being played, the title of the played charged during the connection to the vehicle. The
the data. track is displayed. If the tags are not provided then display will show a notification message, for a few
a notification message is displayed. seconds, that it is reading the data.
If the audio system has been turned off while the
USB memory was playing, pressing will start When the j5 button is pressed repeatedly, If the audio system has been turned off while the
the USB memory operation. further information about the track can be displayed iPod was playing, pressing will start the iPod
along with the track title as follows: operation. During the connection, the iPod can
<AUX> button only be operated with the audio controls.
Track time Artist name Album title Folder
To operate the USB memory use one of the follow-
name Track time * iPod and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
ing methods: registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Track details:
Press the <AUX> button then turn the <TUNE/
A long press on the j5 button will turn the dis- Compatibility:
MENU> dial to the [USB] item. Once highlighted,
press <ENTER>. play into a detailed overview and after a few sec- The following compatible models are:
onds it returns to the main display, or press 5
j
Press <AUX> repeatedly until [USB] is high- briefly. iPhone 3GS (firmware version 3.1.2 or later)
lighted, then press <ENTER>.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


First generation: Some iPod operations may not be available For further information about each item, see the
iPod nano (firmware version 1.3.1 or later) with this system. iPod owners manual.
iPod touch (firmware version 2.2.1 or later)
iPhone (firmware version 2.2.1 or later) Make sure that the iPods/iPhones is up- The following operations are identical to the audio
dated with the latest firmware. main operation of the Compact Disc (CD) opera-
Second generation:
iPod Shuffle and iPod mini cannot be used
tion. For details, see Compact Disc (CD)
iPod touch (firmware version 3.1.2 or later) operation earlier in this section.
with this system.
iPod nano (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)
iPhone 3G (firmware version 3.1.3 or later) <AUX> button List view

Third generation To operate the iPod use one of the following meth-
Quick search
iPod touch (firmware version 3.1.3 or later) ods: ,
iPod nano (firmware version 1.1.3 PC or later)
Press the <AUX> button then turn the <TUNE/ MIX (Random play)
Fourth generation: iPod Classic (firmware ver- MENU> dial for the [iPod] item. Once high-
RPT (Repeat track)
sion 3.1.1 or later) lighted, press <ENTER>.
Fifth generation: Press <AUX> repeatedly until [iPod] is high-
Folder browsing
iPod Nano (firmware version 1.0.2 PC or later) lighted then press <ENTER>. m button j
5
iPod Video (firmware version 1.3 or later)
Audio main operation While a track with recorded music information tags
Sixth generation:
Interface: (ID3tags) is being played, the title of the played
iPod Classic 80GB (firmware version 1.1.2PC
or later) The interface for iPod operation shown on the track is displayed. If the tags are not provided then
iPod Classic 120GB (firmware version 1.1.2 audio system display is similar to the iPod inter- a notification message is displayed.
or later) face. Use the <TUNE/MENU> dial and the When the j5 button is pressed repeatedly,
iPod Classic 160GB (firmware version 2.0.4 <ENTER> button to play a track on the iPod. further information about the track can be displayed
PC or later) along with the track title as follows:
The following items can be chosen from the menu
NOTE list screen. Track time Artist name Album title Track
time
At the time of publication, this audio system [Playlists]
was tested with the latest iPod players/iP- Track details:
hone available. Due to the frequent update
[Artist]
A long press on the j5 button, the screen dis-
of consumer devices like MP3 players, [Albums]
plays the song title, artist name, and album title.
NISSAN cannot guarantee that all new iPod [Songs] After a few seconds it returns to the main display or
players/iPhone launched will be compatible press j5 briefly.
with this audio system.

4-38 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


BLUETOOTH OPERATION BLUETOOTH settings
To set up the Bluetooth system with your preferred
device, push the <SETUP> button and select [Blue-
tooth], then push the <ENTER> button or alterna-
tively, press the button. The following items are
available:
[Pair Device]
Bluetooth devices can be paired with the sys-
tem. A maximum of 5 Bluetooth devices can be NAA1202

NAA1211 registered.
[Select Device] [Pair Device]:
Regulatory information Paired Bluetooth devices are listed and can be 1. Press the <SETUP> button. Select the [Blue-
selected for connection. tooth] key using the<TUNE/MENU> dial. Then
Bluetooth is a trademark
press the <ENTER> button.
m owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. [Delete Device]
You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth mo-
A registered Bluetooth device can be deleted.
CE statement bile phones. However, you can only use one de-

Hereby DAEWOO IS Corp. declares that this sys-


[On/Off] vice at a time. If you have 5 different Bluetooth
registered devices, a new device can only re-
tem is in compliance with the essential requirements If this setting is turned off, the connection be-
place one of the 5 existing paired devices. Use
and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/ tween the Bluetooth devices and the in-vehicle
[Delete Device] key to delete one of the existing
EC. Bluetooth module will be cancelled.
paired devices. For details, see [Delete Device]
later in this section.
2. Select the [Pair Device] key.

NOTE
m The pairing procedure
connected device:
Mobile phone:
depends on the

The message [Ready to Pair Pin:1234] will


The audio system only supports Bluetooth de- be displayed.
vices with AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control
Profile) version 1.3, or 1.0 or earlier.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio device without PIN code: will return to the current audio source display. [Delete Device]:
During connection the following status icons will A registered device can be removed from the Blue-
The Bluetooth connection will be automati-
be displayed (top left of the display): Signal tooth audio system. Select a registered device then
cally connected without any further input.
strength ( ), Battery status* ( ) and Blue- press <ENTER> to confirm to deletion.
Audio device with PIN code: tooth ON ( ).
[On/Off]:
A new screen will appear. Assign the 4 digit *: If the low battery message comes on, the
PIN code by turning the <TUNE/MENU> dial Bluetooth device must be recharged soon. If Bluetooth has been switched off a notification
to each code and press the <ENTER> button message [On/Off] appears when you select [Blue-
The pairing procedure and operation may vary ac- tooth] from the setup menu screen, or press . To
to confirm. Then select [Validate] and press
cording to device type and compatibility. See the switch the Bluetooth signal on, press <ENTER>
<ENTER>. The Bluetooth connection will be
Bluetooth owners manual for further details. and a follow up screen will appear. Then select [On]
made.
NOTE and press <ENTER> to display the Bluetooth set-
The 4digit PIN code is provided with the tings menu screen.
audio device, see the owners manual of the For device details, see your audio/mobile
audio device. phone Owners Manual.
3. On Bluetooth audio/mobile phone devices. For assistance with the Bluetooth audio/
1) Switch on the Bluetooth connection, if not mobile phone integration, please visit your lo-
already switched on. cal NISSAN dealer.

2) Switch on the search mode for Bluetooth [Select Device]:


devices. If the search mode finds a device it The paired device list shows which Bluetooth au-
will be shown on the device display. dio or mobile phone devices have been paired or
registered with the Bluetooth audio system. If the
3) When a device is found use the <TUNE/ NAA1203
list contains devices then select the appropriate de-
MENU> dial to scroll to, and press <ENTER>
vice to connect to the Bluetooth audio system.
to select [My Car].
The following symbols (where fitted) indicate the Bluetooth audio streaming main
4) Enter the number code shown on the relevant operation
capability of the registered device:
device with the devices own keypad, and
press the confirmation key on the device it- : Mobile phone integration Turn the ignition switch to the Acc or ON position.
self. Refer to the relevant Bluetooth device If the audio system was turned off while the Blue-
owners manual for further details. : Audio streaming (A2DP Advanced Audio tooth audio was playing, pressing the < > but-
Distribution Profile) ton will start the Bluetooth audio streaming.
When successfully paired a notification message
will be displayed, then the audio system display

4-40 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


<AUX> button: m button j
5 (Type B display screen
To operate the Bluetooth audio streaming use one only)
of the following methods:
If the song contains music information tags (ID3
Press the <AUX> button, then turn the <TUNE/ tags), the title of the played song will be displayed.
MENU> dial to highlight [BT Audio], and press If tags are not provided then the display will not
<ENTER>. show any messages.
Press <AUX> repeatedly until [BT Audio] is high- When the j5 button is pressed repeatedly fur-
lighted, then press <ENTER>. ther information about the song can be displayed
along with the song title.
The type of display, j
A or j
B , shown on the audio
system can vary depending on the Bluetooth ver- A long press on j5 will turn the display into a
sion of the device. detailed overview which after a few seconds returns
to the main display; or press j5 briefly.
Fast Forward (Cue), Fast
Reverse (Review) buttons: Bluetooth mobile phone feature
When the (Cue) or (Review) button is This system offers a hands-free facility for your mo-
pressed continuously, the track will be played at bile telephone with Bluetooth to enhance driving
high speed. When the button is released, the track safety, and comfort.
will be played at normal playing speed.
For details, see Mobile phone integration for FM
Track up/down buttons: AM radio with CD player later in this section.
Pressing the or button once, the track will
be skipped forward to the next track or backward to
the beginning of the current played track. Press the
or button more than once to skip through
the tracks.
Play/Pause:
Press the <ENTER> button to pause. To resume,
press <ENTER> again.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Specification chart

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW


Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
* Files saved using the Live File System Component (on a Windows Vista-based
computer) are not supported.
Supported versions*1 MP3 Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
Sampling frequency 32 KHz - 44.1 KHz - 48 KHz
Bit rate 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256, 288, 320, 336,
384, 448, VBR. Kbps *4
WMA*3 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Sampling frequency 16 KHz, 22.05 KHz, 32 KHz, 44.1KHz, 48 KHz
Bit rate 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320, VBR kbps *4
Tag information (Song title and Artist name) ID tag VER. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 (MP3 only)
WMA tag (WMA only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), files: 512
Text character number limitation File Name: Min 11 Characters ( Max 30 Characters) ID3 TAG : Min 24
Characters. (Max 60 Characters)*
Displayable character codes*2 01:ASCll, 02: ISO-8859-1 03: UNICODE(UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04:
UNICODE(UTF-16 Ncn-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE(UTF-8),
06:UNICODE(Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*3 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly. WMA7 and WMA8 are not applied to VBR.
*5 Support 128 Bytes but it depends on display width and character type.

4-42 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


NISSAN CONNECT (where fitted) STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL (where fitted)

MAIN OPERATION m or m Scrolling switch


Preset station change (radio mode)
Push the up/down scrolling switch ( or ) for
less than 1.5 seconds to select one of the preset
radio stations.
Seek tuning (radio mode)
Push the up/down scrolling switch ( or ) for
more than 1.5 seconds to seek for the next or
NAA1115
previous radio station.
NAA960Z
Track up/down (CD mode)
For details, see the separately provided NISSAN
Connect Owners Manual. A
j Scrolling switch Push the up/down scrolling switch ( or ) for
less than 1.5 seconds to select the next track or
B
j (INFO) button to return to the beginning of the present track.
C
j Telephone button Push (up/down) several times to skip through or
skip back the tracks.
D
j Volume control buttons
DISC change (CD mode where fitted)
E
j Source button
Push the up/down scrolling switch ( or ) for
The audio system can be operated using the con- more than 1.5 seconds to change the playing
trols on the steering-wheel. disc.
To use the steering wheel audio switch, push the
m INFO button
power ON button of the audio unit with the ignition
switch in either the Acc or ON position.
For additional information on the button, see
NOTE Vehicle information display in the 2. Instruments
and controls section.
For models with NISSAN Connect system, the
steering switch for audio control is described in m Telephone button
the separately provided NISSAN Connect Own-
ers Manual. For additional information on the telephone button,
see Mobile phone integration for LW-MW-FM ra-
dio with CD player or 6 CD changer (Type A) later

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO MOBILE PHONE INTEGRATION FOR
LW-MW-FM RADIO WITH CD
PLAYER OR 6 CD CHANGER (Type A)
in this section or Mobile phone integration for FM When installing large capacity wireless equipment BLUETOOTH MOBILE PHONE
AM radio with CD player later in this section. or a car phone in your NISSAN, be sure to observe FEATURE
the following as it may adversely affect the Engine
SOURCE button control system and other electronic parts depend-
Repeatedly press the SOURCE button to select a ing on its installation location.
source. CAUTION
m Volume control buttons Keep the antenna as far as possible away from
the Electric Control Module.
Press the + or button to adjust the volume.
Also keep the antenna wire more than 20 cm
(8 inches) away from the Electro Injection har-
ness. Do not route the antenna wire next to
NAA1125
any harness.
Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as rec-
ommended by the manufacturer. WARNING

Connect the ground wire from the radio chas- Whilst driving, using the mobile phone is ex-
sis to the body. tremely dangerous because it significantly im-
pairs your concentration and diminishes your re-
NOTE action capabilities to sudden changes on the
For further information, visit the NISSAN web site: road, and it may lead to a fatal accident. This
www.nissan-europe.com. Select your country applies to all phone call situations such as when
from the list and go to the SERVICES menu. If receiving an incoming call, during a phone con-
not available on the web site, contact a NISSAN versation, when calling through the phone book
dealer or qualified workshop. search, etc.
CAUTION
Certain country jurisdictions prohibit the use of
the mobile phone in the car without hands-free
support.
This chapter provides information about the NISSAN
hands-free phone system using a Bluetooth con-
nection.

4-44 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Bluetooth is a wireless radio communication stan- Your mobile phone has not been paired with the Delete phone
dard. This system offers a hands-free facility for your Bluetooth system of the audio unit.
mobile telephone to enhance driving comfort. Bluetooth connection
The mobile phone does not support Bluetooth
Delete phone book
NOTE technology (BT Core v1.2, Hands Free Profile
v1.0 and Object Push Profile v1.0). Pairing procedure:
For models with NISSAN Connect system, see
the separately provided Owners Manual. NOTE If you wish to make a Bluetooth connection for the
first time between your mobile phone and the Blue-
In order to use your mobile phone with the Blue- For details, see your mobile phones Owners tooth system of the audio unit, follow the pairing
tooth of the audio system, the mobile phone must Manual. procedure as described below:
first be set-up. For details, see Hands-free tele-
phone setup later in this section. Once it has been For assistance with your mobile phone inte- 1) Turn the ignition switch to the Acc position.
gration, please visit your local NISSAN dealer.
set-up, the hands-free mode is automatically acti- 2) Switch on the audio system and your mobile
vated on the registered mobile phone (via Blue- phone.
tooth) when it comes into range.
For the vehicle:
A notification message on the audio display comes
on when the phone is connected, when an incoming 1) Briefly press <MENU> button.
call is being received as well as when a call is initi- 2) Press <ENTER> button.
ated.
3) Turn the <MENU/VOL> dial and select [PAIR
When a call is active, the audio system, microphone PHONE] then press <ENTER> button.
(located in the ceiling in front of the rear view mirror)
and the steering wheel switches enable hands-free 4) The display shows [READY TO PAIR] then
NAA1076
communication. [PASSCODE=1234].

If the audio system is being used at the time, the On the mobile phone:
Hands-free telephone setup
radio or CD mode will be muted and will stay muted 1) Activate the Bluetooth connection.
until the active call has ended. A Phone button
j
2) Activate the search mode for Bluetooth equip-
If the Bluetooth system is unable to connect with B Phone book button
j ment. Refer to your mobile phone manual for fur-
your mobile phone, this may occur because: C Phone end/ BACK button
j ther details. If the search mode finds the device,
it will be shown on your mobile phone display.
The mobile phone is too far away from the ve- The following options can be selected:
hicle. 3) Select the device name [MY CAR].
Paired list

The Bluetooth mode on your mobile phone has 4) Enter the passcode number 1234 as shown on
not been activated. Pair phone the display of the audio unit with the keypad on

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


your mobile phone then press the confirmation You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth mobile
Action Screen display
button on your mobile phone. phones. However, you can only use one mobile
Briefly press
phone at a time. If you have 5 different Bluetooth
Action Screen display <MENU> button
mobile phones registered, a new mobile phone can
Press briefly <MENU> [PHONE SETUP]
only replace one of the 5 existing paired mobile
button Press <ENTER>
phones. Use [DEL PHONE] to delete one of the
[PHONE SETUP] existing paired mobile phones. button
Press <ENTER> button [PAIRED LIST]
Paired phone list:
[PAIRED LIST] Press <ENTER>
Turn <MENU/VOL> dial [PAIR PHONE] The paired phone list shows which mobile phones button
have been paired or registered with the Bluetooth Mobile 1

system. If the list contains multiple mobile phones Turn <MENU/
Press <ENTER> button [READY TO PAIR] Mobile 2
then you can select the appropriate mobile phone to VOL> dial
[PASSCODE=1234] connect with the Bluetooth system.

Your mobile phone setup:
select MY CAR then enter Press <ENTER>
[PLEASE WAIT]
1234 button

[m CONNECT [m CONNECT
If successful [PAIRING OK] OK FAIL]
[PAIRED LIST]
[m CONNECT OK]

Mobile 1 *1
Press m but-
[PAIR PHONE] ton repeatedly
for the main
Press m button repeat- screen.
edly for the main screen.
In the above example procedure, Mobile 2 will be
*1 Mobile name connected.
Once the connection is finalised, the audio unit will
automatically register the mobile phone and the au-
dio unit display shows [PAIRING OK] and [ CON-
NECT OK]. If it fails to register [PAIRING FAIL]
then start the procedure, previously described,
again or consult your mobile phone manual.

4-46 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Removing a paired phone: Bluetooth activation: Delete phone book list:

Deletes the connection between the Bluetooth sys- Activates or deactivates the Bluetooth function. To delete all the contacts from the phone book, pro-
tem and the registered mobile phone. You will need to activate the Bluetooth function in ceed as follows:
order to enable your hands-free phone system (ex-
Action Screen display Action Screen display
cept in the pairing mode where it will be activated
Briefly press <MENU> button Briefly press <MENU> but-
automatically).
[PHONE SETUP] ton
Action Screen display [PHONE SETUP]
Press <ENTER> button
Briefly press <MENU> button Press <ENTER> button
[PAIRED LIST]
[PHONE SETUP] [PAIRED LIST]
Turn <MENU/VOL> dial
Press <ENTER> button Turn <MENU/VOL> dial [DEL P.BOOK]
[DEL PHONE]
[PAIRED LIST]
Press <ENTER> button
Turn <MENU/VOL> dial [BLUETOOTH] Press <ENTER> button [DEL ALL? <NO>]
Mobile 1

Turn <MENU/VOL> dial Mobile 2
Press <ENTER> button [BTOOTH <OFF>] Turn <MENU/VOL> dial [DEL ALL? <YES>]


Press <ENTER> button [DELETE?] [YES]
Turn <MENU/VOL> dial [BTOOTH <ON>] Press <ENTER> button [DELETING]

[DELETED]
Press <ENTER> button * [DELETED]
Press <ENTER> button [BLUETOOTH] [DEL P.BOOK]
[DEL PHONE]

[m [CONNECT OK]
Press m button repeatedly Press m button repeatedly
Mobile name for the main screen.
for the main screen.
Main screen
* For the Mobile 2 connection the screen displays [ Phone book
DISCONNECTED], followed by Mobile 2, then [DE-
LETED]. When the (phone book) button is pressed, the
following options can be selected by turning the
In the above example, Mobile 2 will be deleted <MENU/VOL> dial in either direction.
while Mobile 1 remains connected to the system.
[SEARCH]
Names (contact names)
Speed dial mode [1NAME]

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[DELETE NAME]
Action Screen display Action Screen display
[EDIT NAME] Press with a long press the [OK <@OK0>]

[ADD NAME] Press <ENTER> button [SAVED]


m button
Send name using Bluetooth
technology [
[ADD NAME] Press m button for the main
ADD NAME]
Press <ENTER> button screen.
The phone book can store up to 100 names with [ENTER NAME]
numbers and can be selected for calling. To add a NOTE
Turn <MENU/VOL> dial [ABC]
contact to the phone book proceed as follows: In the above example the contact name JO and
Focus on J [IJK]
phone number 123456789 will be added.
Press <ENTER> button
*1 To insert special characters select the following char-
Turn <MENU/VOL> dial [NOP] acter options A: Alphabetic characters, 1/2: Numerical
Focus on O characters, : Latin characters and @: Symbol charac-
ters.
Press <ENTER> button *2 Select the number then confirm your selection by press-
*1 *3 [JO] ing the <ENTER> button then proceed likewise for ev-
Turn <MENU/VOL> dial [OK <@OKA>] ery number.
*3 To correct an entry, briefly press the (back) button
then enter the correct details. To delete all characters
Press <ENTER> button
press the (back) button for more than 1 second.
[ENTER NUMBER]
Press <ENTER> then turn NOTE
1
<MENU/VOL> dial
You can also store the name and the phone
*2 *3 number in one of the six preset buttons on the
Press <ENTER> button [123456789] audio unit for frequent use phone numbers.

Transferring an entry to the Phone book:
Turn <MENU/VOL> dial
You can also send a name (contact) from a con-
[OK <@OK0>]
nected mobile phone to the phone book using Blue-
tooth technology.

4-48 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EDIT:
Action Screen display Action Screen display
You can edit a name or phone number stored in the [SAVED]
phone book.
Briefly press m button [EDIT NAME]
[SEARCH] Action Screen display
Press m button for the main
Turn <MENU/VOL> dial screen.
[m ADD NAME] Briefly press m button
[SEARCH] *1 Alternatively use the search mode to select the appro-
Press <ENTER> button [SEND NAME] Turn <MENU/VOL> dial priate entry to edit.
*1 *2 [JOE] [EDIT NAME] [SEARCH] appears on the display then press the
*3 [0123456789] <ENTER> button.
Press <ENTER> button
Press <ENTER> button Turn the <MENU/VOL> dial to select the first char-
*1 [SEARCH]
acter of the name then press the <ENTER> button.
[SAVE? <YES>] Turn <MENU/VOL> dial [JOE] The name should be displayed. If necessary, turn
Press <ENTER> button the <MENU/VOL> dial to select the correct name.
[SAVED] Press <ENTER> button *2 When the button is pressed briefly, the cursor will
*4
[SEND NAME] [JOE OK <@OKA>] move one step backwards and the last character will be
deleted. To delete all characters press the button
Turn <MENU/VOL> dial
for more than 1 second.
Press m button repeat- Focus on Y [JOE <XYZ>]
edly for the main screen. *3 If necessary, you can edit the telephone number. After
Press <ENTER> button editing the name, select [OK] then press the <ENTER>
*1 The Bluetooth icon will blink for 2 minutes. *2 [JOEY] button to confirm and edit the number as described for
name editing.
*2 Send the name (contact) via the registered mobile Turn <MENU/VOL> dial
phone within the 2 minutes. *3 [OK <@OKA>]
*3 Phone number is displayed.
Press <ENTER> button
*4 During the saving operation, the Bluetooth connection
[EDIT NUMBER]
will be temporarily disconnected.
[OK <@OK0>]
Press <ENTER> button

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Delete a name: Speed dial buttons: to +2. To confirm the entry, press briefly on the
To delete a name (contact) from the phone book, After entering the names and phone numbers, you <ENTER> or (Back) button or wait for 10 sec-
proceed as follows: can assign the six preset buttons to the most fre- onds to return to the active call main screen.
quently dialled phone numbers. Redial:
Action Screen display
1) Press the (phone book) button. Use the redial mode to call the last number that was
dialled.
Briefly press m button 2) Select the name by turning the <MENU/VOL>
[SEARCH] dial or using the search name mode. 1) Press the (phone) button briefly.
Turn <MENU/VOL> dial 3) Once found, press the assigned preset button 2) Select [REDIAL].
[DELETE NAME] until a confirmation beep is heard. The name and
3) Press the <ENTER> or the (phone) button to
Press <ENTER> button phone number is now stored under that button.
redial the last number.
*1 [SEARCH] Hands-free telephone control Make a call from the phone book:
Turn <MENU/VOL> dial [JOE]
The hands-free mode can be operated using the In order to dial a contact from the phone book, pro-

telephone button controls on the audio unit or on the ceed as follows:
Press <ENTER> button steering wheel (where fitted).
[DELETE ? <YES>] 1) Press the phone book ( ) button.
Initiating a call:
Press <ENTER> button 2) Turn the <MENU/VOL> dial and select the cor-
[DELETED]
A call can be initiated using one of the following respondent name.
methods:
3) Press the <ENTER> or (phone) button in or-
Press m button for the main redial der to dial the number.
screen.
phone book Alternatively you can use the search mode as fol-
*1 Alternatively use the search mode to select the appro- voice tag lows:
priate entry to delete.
speed dial (preset buttons) 1) Briefly press the phone book ( ) button.
[SEARCH] appears on the display then press the
<ENTER> button. 2) [SEARCH] appears on the display then press
NOTE
Turn the <MENU/VOL> dial to select the first char- the <ENTER> button.
acter of the name then press the <ENTER> button. During the active call you can adjust the micro-
phone volume by pressing briefly on the <MENU> 3) Select the first character of the name then the
The name should be displayed. If necessary, turn
the <MENU/VOL> dial to select the correct name. button then adjust the volume by turning the <ENTER> button.
<MENU/VOL> dial within the value range of 2 4) The name should be displayed.

4-50 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


If necessary, turn the <MENU/VOL> dial to se- Alternatively, you can select the corresponding Volume control buttons:
lect the correct name. preset number by turning the <MENU/VOL> dial The volume control buttons allows you to adjust the
instead of pressing the preset button. volume of the speakers by pressing the + or but-
5) Press the <ENTER> or (phone) button in or-
der to dial the number. Receiving a call ton.
Calling via voice tag: When receiving an incoming call, the display will Telephone button:
If your mobile phone supports voice recognition, it is show the caller identification (or [NO NUMBER]) The phone ( ) button allows you to:
possible to make a call via the voice tag instead of and you can:
manual selection, provided the name and number of
accept an incoming call by pressing the phone
your contact has been previously marked and stored
answer the call by pressing briefly on the ( ) button once.
(phone) button.
in the phone book of your mobile phone. For details, reject an incoming call when the phone ( ) but-
see the mobile phone manufacturers owners end the call after the conversation by pressing ton is pressed for more than 2 seconds during
manual. the button. the incoming call.
In order to dial via a voice tag, proceed as follows: reject the call by pressing the button. end an active call by pressing the phone ( ) but-
ton once.
1) Press the (phone) button for more than 2 sec- Steering wheel switch (where fitted)
onds. redial the last outgoing call by pressing the phone
( ) button twice.
2) The display shows [SPEAK NOW].
3) Give your voice tag.
make a speed dial call by pressing the phone
( ) button then push the scrolling (up/down)
Say the voice tag clearly and normally in the di- switch to scroll through the preset buttons for
rection of the microphone (located in ceiling in the stored phone numbers. To confirm the selec-
front of the rear view mirror). tion press the phone ( ) button to make the call.
4) If the voice tag is correct, the phone system will make a call via voice dialling by pressing the
dial the corresponding number. phone ( ) button for more than 2 seconds then
NAA998Z
say the voice tag clearly.
Make a call via speed dial:
To make a speed dial call using one of the assigned A Telephone button
j
preset buttons, proceed as follows:
B Volume control buttons
j
1) Press the (phone) button briefly.
The hands-free mode can be operated using the
2) Press the corresponding preset button (16). controls on the steering wheel.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MOBILE PHONE INTEGRATION FOR FM AM RADIO WITH CD PLAYER

BLUETOOTH MOBILE PHONE Bluetooth is a wireless radio communication stan- The Bluetooth mode on your mobile phone has
FEATURE dard. This system offers a hands-free facility for your not been activated.
mobile telephone to enhance driving comfort.
Your mobile phone has not been paired with the
NOTE Bluetooth system of the audio unit.
For models with NISSAN Connect system, see The mobile phone does not support Bluetooth
the separately provided Owners Manual. technology (BT Core v2.0).
In order to use your mobile phone with the Blue- NOTE
tooth of the audio system, the mobile phone must
first be setup. For details, see BLUETOOTH For models with NISSAN Connect (Audio with
Navigation system) see the separately pro-
settings later in this section. Once it has been
vided Owners Manual.
NAA1209
setup, the hands-free mode is automatically acti-
vated on the registered mobile phone (via Blue- For details, see your mobile phones Owners
tooth) when it comes into range. Manual.
WARNING A notification message appears on the audio display For assistance with your mobile phone inte-
Whilst driving, using the mobile phone is ex- when the phone is connected, when an incoming gration, please visit your local NISSAN dealer.
tremely dangerous because it significantly im- call is being received, as well as when a call is initi-
pairs your concentration and diminishes your re- ated.
action capabilities to sudden changes on the When a call is active, the audio system, microphone
road, and it may lead to a fatal accident. This (located in the ceiling in front of the rear view mir-
applies to all phone call situations such as when ror), and steering wheel switches enable hands-free
receiving an incoming call, during a phone con- communication.
versation, when calling through the phone book
search, etc. If the audio system is in use at the time, the radio,
CD, or AUX source mode will be muted and will stay
CAUTION muted until the active call has ended.
NAA1197
Certain country jurisdictions prohibit the use of The Bluetooth system may be not be able to con-
the mobile phone in the car without hands-free nect with your mobile phone for the following rea-
support. sons: A Phone button
j
This chapter provides information about the NISSAN B Phone book quick search button
j
hands-free phone system using a Bluetooth con-
The mobile phone is too far away from the ve-
hicle. C
j (Back) button
nection.

4-52 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


BLUETOOTH settings play): Signal strength ( ), Battery status ( ), and Redial:
Bluetooth ( ). To redial or call the last number dialled, press < >
To setup the Bluetooth system to pair (connect or *: If the low battery message comes on, the Blue-
register) your preferred mobile phone, push the for more than 2 seconds.
tooth device must be recharged soon.
<SETUP> button, select the [Bluetooth] key, and
then push the <ENTER> button. It is also possible to HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE
enter the setup menu directly via the < > (phone) CONTROL
button.
The hands-free mode can be operated using the
The following options can be selected: telephone < > button on the audio system, or
(where fitted) on the steering wheel.
[Pair Device]
Bluetooth mobile phones can be paired with the Initiating a call
system. A maximum of 5 Bluetooth mobile A call can be initiated using one of the following
phones can be registered. methods: NAA1199

[Select Device] Redial


Making a call from the phone book:
Paired Bluetooth mobile phones ( ) are listed Phone book
on the display and can be selected for connec- Once the Bluetooth connection has been made,
tion. Manual dialling between the registered mobile phone and the audio
Missed calls system, phone book data will be transferred auto-
[Delete Device] matically to the audio system. The transfer may take
A registered Bluetooth mobile phone can be de- Dialled calls a while before completion.
leted. Received calls NOTE
[On]/[Off]
Phone book data will be erased when:
If this setting is turned off, the connection be-
tween the Bluetooth devices and the in-vehicle Switching to another registered mobile
phone.
Bluetooth module will be cancelled.
For details, see BLUETOOTH settings earlier in Mobile phone is disconnected.
this section. The registered mobile phone is deleted from
the audio system.
When successfully paired, a notification message
will be displayed. During the connection the follow- 1. Press < >.
ing status icons will be displayed (top left of dis-

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2. Turn the <TUNE/MENU> dial and scroll down to 4. After entering the last number, scroll to the [ ]
[Phone Book] then press <ENTER>. symbol, and press <ENTER>, or press < > to
dial the number.
3. Scroll down through the list, select the appropri-
ate contact name (highlighted), and press Call Lists:
<ENTER>. A number from the dialled, received, or missed call
4. A following screen will show the number to be lists can also be used to make a call.
dialled. If correct, press <ENTER> again to dial
the number.
Dialled call
Use the dialled call mode to make a call which is
If the contact has more numbers assigned for NAA1198 based on the list of outgoing (dialled) calls.
(home), (mobile), or (office), scroll,
and select the appropriate number to dial. Received call
Manually dialling a phone number:
Alternatively, the quick search mode can be used as Use the received call mode to make a call which
follows: is based on the list of received calls.
WARNING
1. Press <A-Z/j
6 >. Park the vehicle in a safe location, and apply the Missed call

2. Turn the <TUNE/MENU> dial for the first alpha- handbrake before making a call. Use the missed call mode to make a call which
betic or numerical letter of the contact name. is based on the list of missed calls.
To dial a phone number manually use the audio sys-
Once highlighted, press <ENTER> to select the tem display (virtual keyboard pad) as follows: 1. Press < >, and select [Call Lists].
letter.
1. Press < >, and turn the <TUNE/MENU> dial to 2. Turn the <TUNE/MENU> dial to scroll to an item,
3. The display will show the corresponding contact highlight [Call Number]. and press <ENTER> to select it.
name(s). Where necessary, use the <TUNE/
MENU> dial again to scroll further for the appro- 2. Press <ENTER> to select [Call Number]. 3. Scroll to the preferred phone number then press
priate contact name to call. <ENTER>, or press < > to dial the number.
3. Turn the <TUNE/MENU> dial to scroll along, and
4. A following screen will show the number to be select each number of the phone number. Once
dialled. If correct, press <ENTER> again to dial highlighted, press <ENTER> after each number
the number. selection.
To delete the last number entered scroll to the
[] (Backspace) symbol, and once highlighted
press <ENTER>. The last number will be de-
leted. Pressing <ENTER> repeatedly will delete
each subsequent number.

4-54 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[#123] Use this item to enter numbers during Volume control buttons
a call. For example, if directed by an automated
phone system to dial an extension number the The volume control buttons allow you to adjust the
system will send the tone associated with the volume of the speakers by pressing the <+> or <
selected number. > button.

[ ] Use this item (the transfer handset com- Telephone button


mand) to transfer the call from the audio system The phone < > button allows you to:
to your mobile phone.
To transfer the call back to hands-free via the
Accept an incoming call by pressing < > once.
NAA1200
audio system select [ ]. Reject an incoming call by pressing < > for
more than 2 seconds during the incoming call.
STEERING WHEEL SWITCHES
Receiving a call (where fitted) End an active call by pressing the < > button
once.
When receiving an incoming call, the display will
show the callers phone number (or a notification Redial the last outgoing call by pressing the < >
message that the callers phone number cannot be button for more than 2 seconds.
shown):
Answer the call by pressing < > briefly, or press
<ENTER>.
End the call, after the conversation, by:
Pressing < > briefly again.
NAA998Z
Pressing <ENTER> when the [ ] symbol is
highlighted.
If [ ] is not highlighted, turn the <TUNE/ A Telephone button
j
MENU> dial to [ ], and press <ENTER>. B Volume control buttons
j
Reject the call by pressing < > with a long press The hands-free mode can be operated using the
or select [ ] from the incoming call screen. steering wheel switches.
During a call:
During a call, by scrolling and pressing <ENTER>,
you can select the following options:

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5 Starting and driving

Running-in schedule ................................................ 5-2 Emergency key Intelligent Key dead battery
Before starting the engine ........................................ 5-2 situation.............................................................. 5-10
Precautions when starting and driving ...................... 5-3 NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)..................... 5-10
Exhaust gas (Carbon Monoxide) ......................... 5-3 Starting the engine................................................... 5-11
On-pavement and off-road driving precautions ......... 5-4 Driving the vehicle.................................................... 5-12
Three-way catalyst (Petrol engine models)................ 5-4 Driving with manual transmission......................... 5-12
To help prevent damage ..................................... 5-4 Driving with automatic transmission or with
Turbocharger system (Diesel engine models) ........... 5-5 continuously variable transmission (Models
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) (where fitted)............. 5-5 with manual shift)................................................ 5-14
Regeneration restrictions .................................... 5-5 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmis-
If regeneration fails ............................................. 5-5 sion (CVT) (Models without manual shift) ............ 5-17
Care when driving ................................................... 5-6 Stop/Start System (where fitted) .............................. 5-21
Engine cold start period ...................................... 5-6 Normal operation ................................................ 5-21
Loading luggage................................................. 5-6 Precautions ........................................................ 5-22
Driving on wet roads........................................... 5-6 Stop/Start System OFF switch ........................... 5-23
Driving under winter conditions ........................... 5-6 Environmental savings ........................................ 5-23
Ignition switch.......................................................... 5-6 Ultrasonic Parking Sensor (where fitted) .................. 5-24
Manual transmission ........................................... 5-6 Four-wheel Drive (4WD) (where fitted)..................... 5-24
Automatic transmission or Continuously 4WD mode operations........................................ 5-25
variable transmission........................................... 5-7 4WD shift tips .................................................... 5-25
Steering lock ...................................................... 5-7 4WD Warning light ............................................. 5-26
Key positions ...................................................... 5-7 4WD Mode indicator lights ................................. 5-27
NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)..................... 5-7 Driving four-wheel drive (4WD) safely ................. 5-27
Ignition knob (where fitted)....................................... 5-8 Cruise control (where fitted) .................................... 5-29
Manual transmission ........................................... 5-8 Precautions on cruise control.............................. 5-29
Automatic transmission or Continuously Cruise control system operations ........................ 5-30
variable transmission........................................... 5-9 Speed limiter ........................................................... 5-31
Steering lock ...................................................... 5-9 Speed limiter operations ..................................... 5-32
Ignition knob position .......................................... 5-9 Parking .................................................................... 5-33
Trailer towing........................................................... 5-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Operating precautions ........................................ 5-35 Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) system
Tyre pressure ..................................................... 5-36 (where fitted) ........................................................... 5-40
Safety chains ...................................................... 5-36 Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) OFF
Trailer brakes...................................................... 5-36 switch................................................................. 5-42
Trailer detection (where fitted) ............................ 5-36 Cold weather driving................................................ 5-42
Installation of coupling device ............................. 5-36 Battery ............................................................... 5-43
Vehicle security........................................................ 5-38 Engine coolant.................................................... 5-43
Power steering system............................................. 5-38 Tyre equipment................................................... 5-43
Brake system........................................................... 5-39 Special winter equipment.................................... 5-43
Brake precautions .............................................. 5-39 Corrosion protection........................................... 5-43
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).......................... 5-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RUNNING-IN SCHEDULE BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

During the first 1,600 km (1,000 miles), follow these


WARNING
Check the operation of the warning/indicator
recommendations for the future reliability and lights when the ignition switch is turned to the
economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow the The driving characteristics of your vehicle can be ON position.
recommendations may result in shortened engine changed remarkably by any additional load and
life and reduced engine performance. its distribution as well as by adding optional
Do not place hard or heavy objects on the dash-
board or rear parcel shelf in order to prevent
equipment (trailer couplings, roof racks, etc.).
Avoid driving for long periods at a constant
Your driving style and speed have to be adjusted
injury in the event of a sudden stop.
speed, either fast or slow.
accordingly. Especially when carrying heavy
Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. loads, your speed must be reduced adequately.
Avoid quick starts. Make sure the area around the vehicle is free of
Avoid hard braking as much as possible. obstacles.

Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 km (500 Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant,
miles). brake and clutch fluid, and window washer fluid
as frequently as possible, at least whenever you
NOTE refuel.
Models with K9K diesel engine will achieve top Visually inspect tyres for their appearance and
performance only after approximately 5,000 km condition. Also check the tyre pressure for
(3,000 miles). proper inflation.
Maintenance items in the 8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself section should be checked peri-
odically.
Check that all windows and light lenses are
clean.
Check that all doors are closed.
Position the seat and adjust the head restraints.
Adjust the inside and outside mirrors.
Fasten your seat belt and ask all passengers to
do likewise.

5-2 Starting and driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING

WARNING
If you suspect that exhaust fumes are enter- The exhaust system and body should be in-
ing the vehicle, drive with all windows fully spected by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
Do not leave children or adults who would open and have the vehicle inspected immedi- shop whenever:
normally require the support of others alone ately.
the vehicle is raised for service.
in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left
alone. They could accidentally injure them-
Do not run the engine in closed spaces, such
you suspect that exhaust fumes are enter-
as a garage, for any longer than is absolutely
selves or others through inadvertent opera- ing into the passenger compartment.
necessary.
tion of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, you notice a change in the sound of the
temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly Do not park the vehicle with the engine run-
exhaust system.
become high enough to cause severe or pos- ning for any extended length of time.
sibly fatal injuries to people or animals. you have had an accident involving dam-
Keep the back door closed while driving, oth-
age to the exhaust system, underbody, or
To prevent luggage or packages from sliding erwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the
passenger compartment. If you must drive in
rear of the vehicle.
forward during braking, do not stack anything
in the cargo area higher than the seatbacks. this way for some reason, take the following
steps:
Secure all cargo with ropes or straps to pre-
1) Open all the windows.
vent it from sliding or shifting.
Failure to follow proper seating instructions 2) Set the air recirculation mode (
OFF position.
) to the
see Seats in the 1. Safety seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system sec- 3) Set the fan speed control to the maximum
tion, could result in serious personal injury in position to circulate the air.
an accident or sudden stop.
If electrical wiring or other cable connections
EXHAUST GAS (Carbon Monoxide) must pass to a trailer through the seal of the
body, follow the manufacturers recommen-
WARNING dations to prevent carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle.
Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain
colourless and odourless carbon monoxide. When a vehicle has been stopped in an open
Carbon monoxide is a dangerous gas and can area with its engine running for any significant
cause unconsciousness or death. length of time, turn the fan on to force outside
air into the vehicle.

Starting and driving 5-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD THREE-WAY CATALYST (Petrol
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS engine models)

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover NISSAN GREEN PROGRAM Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in
rate than other types of vehicles. the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical sys-
The three-way catalyst is an emission control device
tems can cause over-rich fuel flow into the
They have higher ground clearance than passenger installed in the exhaust system. In the converter,
converter, causing it to overheat.
cars to make them capable of performing in a wide exhaust gases are burned at high temperatures to
variety of on-pavement and off-road applications. help reduce pollutants. Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level.
This gives them a higher centre of gravity than ordi- Running out of fuel could cause the engine to
CAUTION
nary cars. An advantage of higher ground clearance misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.
is a better view of the road, allowing you to antici- The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are
Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or
pate problems. However, they are not designed for very hot. While the engine is running, keep
if noticeable loss of performance or other un-
cornering at the same speeds as conventional two- people or flammable materials away from the
usual operating conditions are detected. Have
wheel drive (2WD) vehicles any more than low-slung exhaust pipe.
the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily
under off-road conditions. If possible, avoid sharp
Do not stop or park the vehicle over flam- dealer or qualified workshop.
mable materials such as dry grass, waste pa-
turns or abrupt manoeuvres, particularly at high
per or rags, as they may burn easily. Do not race the engine while warming it up.
speeds. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of When parking, ensure that people or flam- Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the
engine.
control or vehicle rollover. In a rollover accident an mable materials are kept away from the ex-
unbelted person is significantly more likely to be haust pipe.
injured than a person who is wearing a seat belt.
TO HELP PREVENT DAMAGE
CAUTION
Use UNLEADED PETROL ONLY, specifically
the recommended type. For details, see Ca-
pacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in
the 9. Technical information section.
Do not use leaded petrol. Leaded petrol will
seriously damage three-way catalyst.
Deposits from leaded petrol will seriously re-
duce the three-way catalysts ability to help
reduce exhaust pollutants.

5-4 Starting and driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
(Diesel engine models) (DPF) (where fitted)

The turbocharger system uses engine oil for lubrica- burns-off the accumulated carbon. This regenera-
tion and cooling of its rotating components. The tur- WARNING tion process is normally automatic and not visible to
bocharger turbine turns at extremely high speeds Be careful not to burn yourself with exhaust the driver.
and it can reach an extremely high temperature. It is gases.
essential to maintain a flow of clean oil through the REGENERATION RESTRICTIONS
turbocharger system. A sudden interruption to the Do not park the vehicle over flammable mate- Driving conditions such as frequent short journeys
oil supply may cause a malfunction in the turbo- rials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags, or stop/start driving can result in excessive build up
charger. as they may burn easily.
of carbon in the filter. When this happens the DPF
To ensure prolonged life and performance of the If the vehicle continues to be driven at a low warning light will illuminate (and a message
turbocharger, it is essential to comply with the fol- speed with the DPF warning light illuminated, will appear in the vehicle information display, see
lowing maintenance procedure: the fail-safe will limit engine revolutions and/ Vehicle information display later in this section) to
or torque. In this case, the engine oil must be inform you that the vehicle must be driven in a par-
CAUTION replaced and the process of burning accumu- ticular manner to begin regeneration.
lated particulate matter must be carried out
Change the engine oil of the turbo-charged
by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
When the DPF warning light is illuminated, provided
diesel engine as prescribed. See the sepa- that legal and safety conditions allow, the vehicle
rately provided Warranty Information & Main- Service regeneration is a maintenance item
should be driven at a speed of over 60 km/h (37.5
tenance Booklet for additional information. and is not covered by the NISSAN warranty.
MPH) until the DPF warning light turns off. This pro-
Use only the recommended engine oil. See Use engine oil for DPF equipped models. For cess can take up to 30 minutes to complete.
Capacities and recommended details, see Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants in the 9. Technical
IF REGENERATION FAILS
fuel/lubricants in the 9. Technical
information section. information section. Failure to react to the DPF warning light may
lead to saturation of the DPF system. If this hap-
CAUTION
If the engine has been operating at high rpm pens, the Malfunction Indicator (MI) will also
for an extended period of time, let it idle for a The DPF becomes extremely hot after burning illuminate to indicate that a Service Regeneration by
few minutes prior to shutdown. particulate matter. a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop is required.
Do not accelerate the engine to high rpm im- The engine speed may also be limited to 3,000 rpm
NISSAN GREEN PROGRAM
mediately after starting it. to protect the DPF system.
Some diesel engine models are fitted with a Diesel
Particulate Filter (DPF), which is a device that re- NOTE
moves carbon (soot) from the exhaust gas. To oper- Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop
ate effectively, the DPF system must routinely con- to perform a forced regeneration.
duct a cleaning operation, called regeneration, that

Starting and driving 5-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CARE WHEN DRIVING IGNITION SWITCH

Driving your vehicle to fit the circumstances is es- DRIVING UNDER WINTER
sential for your safety and comfort. As a driver, you CONDITIONS
should be the one who knows best how to drive in
the given circumstances. Drive safely.

ENGINE COLD START PERIOD Avoid starting off, accelerating or stopping sud-
denly.
Due to the higher engine speeds when the engine is
cold, extra caution must be exercised when select- Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
ing a gear during the engine warm-up period after Avoid sudden steering actions.
starting the engine.
Extra distance should be kept from the vehicle in NSD238Z

LOADING LUGGAGE front.


Loads, their distribution and the attachment of equip- 1 OFF
j
ment (coupling devices, roof luggage carriers, etc.)
will change the driving characteristics of the vehicle WARNING
considerably. Driving style and speed must be ad-
justed accordingly. Never remove the key or turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK position while driving. The steering
DRIVING ON WET ROADS wheel will lock and could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. This could result in serious
Avoid starting off, accelerating and stopping sud-
vehicle damage or personal injury.
denly.
The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock de-
Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
vice.
Extra distance should be kept from the vehicle in
There is an OFF position between the LOCK and
front.
Acc positions, although it is not shown on the lock
When water covers the road surface in puddles, cylinder. When the ignition switch is in the OFF
small streams, etc, REDUCE SPEED to prevent position, the steering wheel is not locked.
aquaplaning which will cause skidding and loss
of control. Worn tyres increase this risk. MANUAL TRANSMISSION
To lock the steering wheel, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK position and remove the key from the
ignition switch, then turn the steering clockwise. To

5-6 Starting and driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


unlock the steering wheel, insert the ignition key and When the key cannot be turned toward the LOCK Acc (Accessories) (2)
turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly position, proceed as follows to remove the key:
right and left. This position activates electrical accessories, such
1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park) posi- as the radio, when the engine is not running.
The ignition key can only be removed when the tion.
switch is in the LOCK position (Normal parking po- ON (Normal operating position) (3)
2. Turn the key slightly in the ON direction.
sition) (0). This position turns on the ignition system and elec-
3. Turn the key towards the LOCK position. trical accessories.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OR
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE 4. Remove the key. START (4)
TRANSMISSION STEERING LOCK The engine starter activates and the engine will start.
On Automatic Transmission (AT) or Continuously To lock the steering wheel As soon as the engine has started, release the key
Variable Transmission (CVT) models, the ignition immediately. It will return to the ON position.
lock is designed so that the key cannot be turned to 1. Turn the key to the LOCK position.
NOTE
LOCK and removed until the selector lever is moved 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
to the P (Park) position. For vehicles fitted with Stop/Start System:
3. Turn the steering wheel 1/6 of a turn clockwise
When removing the key from the LOCK position of from the straight up position. When the engine is automatically stopped by the
the ignition switch, make sure that the selector lever Stop/Start System the ignition switch can still be
is in the P (Park) position. To unlock the steering wheel operated as usual.
The selector lever can only be moved from the P 1. Insert the key into the ignition switch. At the end of a journey turn the ignition OFF to
(Park) position when the ignition switch is in the ON 2. Gently turn the key while rotating the steering avoid a flat battery. The Stop/Start System does
position and the footbrake pedal is depressed. wheel slightly right and left. not automatically turn ignition off.
To remove the key from the ignition switch: KEY POSITIONS NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (NATS)
1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park) posi- The NISSAN Anti Theft System (NATS)* will stop
LOCK (Normal parking position) (0)
tion. the engine if someone tries to start the engine with-
The ignition key can only be removed when in this out using the registered NATS key.
2. Turn the key to the LOCK position.
position.
3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. * Immobilizer
The steering lock can only be locked in this position.
If the key is removed from the ignition switch, the If you failed to start the engine using the NATS Key,
selector lever cannot be moved from the P (Park)
OFF (1) turn the ignition knob to the LOCK position, wait for
position. 5 seconds and turn the key to the START position
The engine is turned off without locking the steering
again to start the engine.
wheel.

Starting and driving 5-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


IGNITION KNOB (where fitted)

For additional information, see NISSAN Anti-Theft CAUTION


System (NATS) in the 3. Pre-driving checks and
adjustments section. Make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
Never leave the Intelligent Key inside the ve-
hicle when you leave the vehicle.
If the Intelligent Key is too far away from the
driver, the vehicle may not start.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
NSD350
The ignition lock is designed so that the knob can
ONLY be turned to the LOCK position when the
A
j MT models PUSH release button has first been depressed.
B
j AT/CVT models
NOTE
1
j OFF
The ignition knob warning appears in the ve-
2
j PUSH release button hicle information display and the buzzer
sounds twice when the ignition knob is turned
WARNING to the OFF position. Depress the PUSH re-
lease button j 2 , then turn the ignition knob to
Never turn the ignition knob to the LOCK position the LOCK position. See Ignition knob warn-
while driving as the steering wheel will lock. This ing (Intelligent Key models) in the 2. Instru-
may cause the driver to lose control of the ve- ments and controls section for further details
hicle and could result in serious damage to the regarding the functionality of the ignition knob
vehicle or personal injury. warning.
The ignition knob includes an anti-theft steering lock
device.
When the emergency key is being used, the
PUSH release button j 2 must be depressed
There is an OFF position between the LOCK and in order to turn the ignition knob to the LOCK
Acc positions, although it is not shown on the lock position although the ignition knob warning
cylinder. When the ignition knob is in the OFF will not appear and the buzzer will not sound.
position, the steering wheel is not locked.

5-8 Starting and driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OR IGNITION KNOB POSITION
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE LOCK (Normal parking position) (0)
TRANSMISSION
The steering lock can only be locked in this position.
The ignition knob is designed so that it cannot be
turned to the LOCK position until the selector lever OFF (1)
is moved to the P (Park) position. The selector lever The engine can be turned off without locking the
can only be moved from the P (Park) position when steering wheel.
the ignition knob is in the ON position and the
footbrake pedal is depressed. Acc (Accessories) (2)
NOTE This position activates electrical accessories, such
as the radio, when the engine is not running.
The ignition knob warning appears and a buzzer
sounds twice when the ignition knob is turned to ON (Normal operating position) (3)
the OFF position. Make sure that the selector This position turns on the ignition system and the
lever is in the P (Park) position, then turn the igni- electrical accessories.
tion knob to the LOCK position. See Warnings
and alerts in the 2. Instruments and controls START (4)
section for further details regarding the function-
The engine starter activates and the engine will start.
ality of the ignition knob warning.
As soon as the engine has started, release the knob
STEERING LOCK immediately. It will return to the ON position.

To lock the steering wheel NOTE


In the LOCK position, turn the steering wheel 1/6 of For vehicles fitted with Stop/Start System:
a turn from the straight up position. When the engine is automatically stopped by the
To unlock the steering wheel Stop/Start System the ignition knob can still be
operated as usual.
Depress the brake pedal, push the ignition knob and
turn it towards the Acc position while gently rotating At the end of a journey turn the ignition OFF to
the steering wheel right or left. avoid a flat battery. The Stop/Start System does
not automatically turn ignition off.

Starting and driving 5-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


On AT or CVT models, when the ignition knob can-
not be turned to the LOCK position, proceed as fol-
lows:
1
j Slide the locking pin to the unlock position.
2
j Remove the Intelligent Key cap as illustrated.
3
j A.
Unfold the key j
4
j Remove the ignition knob key slot cap with a
suitable tool.
5 Insert the emergency key j
j A into the ignition
switch as illustrated.
6 Move the selector lever to the P (Park) posi-
j
tion.
7 Turn the emergency key slightly in the ON
j
direction.
8 Turn the emergency key to the LOCK position.
j
9 Remove the emergency key.
j
If the key is removed from the ignition switch, the
selector lever cannot be moved from P (Park). The
NSD291
selector lever can only be moved from the P
(Park) position when the ignition knob is in the
ON position and the footbrake pedal is
EMERGENCY KEY INTELLIGENT 4 Remove the ignition knob key slot cap with a
j depressed.
KEY DEAD BATTERY SITUATION suitable tool.
NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (NATS)
1 Slide the locking pin to the unlock position.
j j A into the ignition
5 Insert the emergency key j
switch as illustrated. The NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)* will stop
2 Remove the Intelligent Key cap as illustrated.
j the engine if someone tries to start the engine with-
6 Proceed with the emergency key as described
j out the registered Intelligent Key.
3 Unfold the key j
j A. in Ignition switch earlier in this section.
* Immobilizer

5-10 Starting and driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


STARTING THE ENGINE

If you failed to start the engine using the NATS Intel- 1. Apply the handbrake. CAUTION
ligent Key, turn the ignition knob to the LOCK posi-
tion, wait for 5 seconds and turn the knob to the
2. Manual transmission models: Make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
START position again to start the engine. Move the gear lever to N (Neutral) position, and
For additional information, see NISSAN Anti-Theft
depress the clutch pedal to the floor while start- If the Intelligent Key is too far away from
ing the engine. the driver, the vehicle may not start.
System (NATS) in the 3. Pre-driving checks and
adjustments section. Automatic transmission or Continuously vari- 4. For diesel engine models: Wait until the glow
able transmission models: indicator light goes out.
Depress the brake pedal and move the selector 5. Crank the engine with your foot on the brake
lever to the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position. pedal, not on the accelerator pedal, by turning
(P position is preferred). the ignition switch to START.
NOTE 6. Release the ignition switch when the engine
starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat
The starter is designed not to operate if the
the above procedure.
selector lever is out of the P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral) position. For petrol engine models:
3. Models without Intelligent Key: NOTE
Rotate the steering wheel left to right to release Models with HR16DE engine:
the ignition lock whilst turning the ignition switch
If the engine is very hard to start because it is
to the ON position.
flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the
Models with Intelligent key: way to the floor and hold it. Crank the engine
for 5-6 seconds and stop. After cranking the
MT models keep the clutch pedal
engine, release the accelerator pedal. Then
depressed and/or depress the brake pedal
crank the engine with your foot off the accel-
then:
erator pedal. Release the ignition switch when
AT or CVT models depress the brake pedal the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails
then: to run, repeat the above procedure.
1) Push the ignition knob. Models with MR20DE engine:
2) Rotate the steering wheel left to right to If the engine is very hard to start in extremely
release the ignition lock whilst turning the cold or hot weather, or when restarting, de-
ignition knob to the ON position. press the accelerator pedal a little (approxi-

Starting and driving 5-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DRIVING THE VEHICLE

mately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it then crank DRIVING WITH MANUAL
the engine. Release the ignition switch and TRANSMISSION
the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than 15
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while
driving. This may cause clutch damage.
seconds at a time. If the engine does not start,
turn the ignition switch to the OFF position Stop your vehicle completely before shifting
and wait 10 seconds (Petrol engine models) into the R (Reverse) position.
or 20 seconds (Diesel engine models) before When you are shifting from one gear to an- NSD340
cranking again, otherwise the starter could be other, be certain to depress the clutch pedal
damaged. 5speed MT
all the way to the floor to avoid clashing or
If it becomes necessary to start the engine chipping the gears.
with a booster battery and jumper leads, the Avoid abrupt starts and acceleration for your
instructions and cautions contained in the safety.
Jump-starting in the 6. In case of
emergency section should be carefully fol- When quick acceleration is required for some
lowed. reason, shift to a lower gear and accelerate
until the vehicle reaches the maximum speed
7. Warm-up in each gear. Do not exceed the speed limit of
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds any gear. Pay special attention when acceler-
after starting. Drive at moderate speed for a short ating or when shifting into a lower gear on
NSD292Z
distance first, especially in cold weather. slippery surfaces. Sudden acceleration or
6speed MT (where fitted)
down shifting could cause the wheels to skid
WARNING and result in loss of control. Shifting
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the A RHD models
j
engine is warming up. B LHD models
j
1 Gear lever ring
j
To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal,
shift into the appropriate gear, then release the
clutch slowly and smoothly.

5-12 Starting and driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress the However, the driver remains responsible for decid-
clutch pedal before operating the gear lever. If the ing the most suitable gear according to actual ve-
clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the trans- hicle, road and traffic conditions.
mission is shifted, a gear noise may be heard. This
NOTE
could result in damage to the transmission.
No arrow is displayed is some circumstances in-
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift through the
cluding:
gears in sequence according to the vehicle speed.
The actual gear matches recommended gear
The vehicle speed is approx. 0 km/h
NIC1639

Model with Stop/Start System Reverse gear:


To reverse with 5speed manual transmission,
stop the vehicle and shift the gear lever into the
N (Neutral) position then to the R (Reverse) posi-
tion.
To reverse with 6speed manual transmission,
proceed as follows:
1) Stop the vehicle.
2) Move the gear lever into the N (Neutral) posi-
tion.
NIC1648

Model without Stop/Start System 3) Pull and hold the gear lever ring j
1 up.
Gear shift indicator (where fitted): 4) Move the gear lever into the R (Reverse) po-
sition.
The gear shift indicator j
A located in the lower part
of the vehicle information display can help to im- 5) Release the gear lever ring and safely drive
prove the level of environmentally friendly driving. the vehicle backwards.
Following the gear shift indicator by changing to a The gear lever ring returns to its original posi-
higher (or lower) gear whenever the UP (or DOWN) tion when the gear lever is moved to the N
arrow is displayed may improve fuel economy (Neutral) position.
An UP arrow suggests shifting to a higher gear, a When the gear lever is in the R (Reverse) position,
down arrow suggests shifting to a lower gear. either the NISSAN Connect monitor (where fitted)

Starting and driving 5-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


or the ultra sonic parking sensor (where fitted) will selector position. If it does, have your vehicle Make sure that the selector lever is in the
be activated. For details, see Rear-view monitor checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified desired position. Use the D (Drive), or Manual
(where fitted) in the 4. Display screen, heater and workshop. shift mode to move forwards and the R (Re-
air conditioner, and audio system section, Around verse) to move backwards. Release the hand-
view monitor (where fitted) in the 4. Display Do not depress the accelerator pedal while
brake lever and the footbrake pedal, then de-
shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Re-
screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio press the accelerator pedal to start the vehicle
verse), D (Drive) or Manual shift modes posi-
system section or Ultrasonic Parking Sensor in motion and merge with traffic (avoid abrupt
tion. Always depress the brake pedal until
(where fitted) later in this section. starting and spinning the wheels).
shifting is completed.
If it is difficult to move the gear lever into R (Re-
On an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by Avoid revving up the engine while the vehicle
verse) or 1st. Shift into N (Neutral), then release the is stopped, this could cause unexpected ve-
depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot-
clutch pedal. Fully depress the clutch pedal again hicle movement [if the selector lever is in the
brake should be used for this purpose, in or-
and shift into R (Reverse) or 1st. R (Reverse), D (Drive), or Manual shift mode
der to hold the vehicle in place and to prevent
position] or damage the engine [if the selec-
DRIVING WITH AUTOMATIC overheating of the transmission.
tor lever is in the N (Neutral) or P (Park) posi-
TRANSMISSION OR WITH Shift into the N (Neutral) position and apply tion].
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE the handbrake when at a standstill for longer
TRANSMISSION (Models with manual than a short waiting period. WARM THE ENGINE UP

shift) Due to the higher idle speeds when the en-


Keep the engine at idling speed while shifting
gine is cold, extra caution must be taken when
CAUTION from the N (Neutral) position to any driving
shifting the selector lever into the driving po-
position.
The cold engine idle speed is high, so use
CAUTION (when starting the vehicle):
sition immediately after starting the engine.
caution when shifting into a forward or re- PARKING THE VEHICLE
verse gear before the engine has warmed up. DEPRESS THE FOOTBRAKE PEDAL
Depress the footbrake pedal and, once the
Avoid revving up the engine while the vehicle When the engine is running, shifting the se- vehicle stops, move the selector lever into the
is stopped. This could cause unexpected ve- lector lever into the R (Reverse), D (Drive) or P (Park) position, pull the handbrake lever and
hicle movement. Manual shift mode position without depress- release the footbrake pedal.
ing the brake pedal causes the vehicle to
Driving precautions move slowly. Be sure the brake pedal is fully Starting the vehicle
Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) while depressed and the vehicle is stopped, before 1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot-
the vehicle is moving, this could result in dam- shifting the selector lever. brake pedal before shifting the selector lever from
age to the transmission.
BE AWARE OF THE SELECTOR LEVER POSI- P (Park) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or Manual shift
Start the engine in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) TION mode.
position. The engine will not start in any other

5-14 Starting and driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2. Keep the footbrake pedal depressed and push Push the button while depressing the and air conditioner, and audio system section,
the selector lever button to shift into a driving m brake pedal. Around view monitor (where fitted) in the 4. Dis-
gear. play screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio
Push the button to shift. system section or Ultrasonic Parking Sensor
3. Release the handbrake and footbrake, then m (where fitted) later in this section.
gradually start the vehicle in motion by pressing Shift without depressing the brake
the accelerator pedal. m pedal. N (Neutral):
The automatic transmission or continuously variable Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The
Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R (Reverse).
transmission is designed so that the footbrake pedal engine can be started in this position. You may shift
All other positions can be selected without pushing
MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to N and restart a stalled engine while driving the
the button.
to any drive position while the ignition switch is ON. vehicle.
P (Park):
D (Drive):
Use this position when the vehicle is parked or when
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
starting the engine. Always make sure that the ve-
hicle is completely stopped before moving the se-
lector lever into the P (Park) position. For maximum
safety, the footbrake pedal must be depressed be-
fore moving the selector lever into the P (Park) posi-
tion. Use this position together with the handbrake.
When parking on a hill, first depress the footbrake
pedal, apply the handbrake and then shift into the P
NSD323Z
(Park) position.
R (Reverse):
Shifting NIC1649
CAUTION
A LHD models
j
Shift into this position only after the vehicle has Gear shift indicator:
B RHD models
j completely stopped.
The gear shift indicator j
A located in the lower part
To move the selector lever: Use this position to reverse the vehicle. of the vehicle information display shows the current
When the selector lever is in the R (Reverse) posi- position of the transmission.
tion, either the NISSAN Connect monitor (where fit- It shows the P,R,N,D modes when the transmission
ted) or the ultra sonic parking sensor (where fitted) is in auto mode. It shows the gear number when the
will be activated. For details, see Rear-view moni- transmission is in manual mode.
tor (where fitted) in the 4. Display screen, heater

Starting and driving 5-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Manual shift mode When cancelling manual shift mode, return the
selector lever to the D (Drive) position. The trans-
When the selector lever is shifted from D (Drive) to mission returns to the normal driving mode.
the manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or
while driving, the transmission enters manual shift In manual shift mode, the transmission may
mode. Shift range can be selected manually. not shift to the selected gear under certain
circumstances. This helps maintain driving
In manual shift mode, the selected gear is displayed performance and reduces the chance of ve-
on the position indicator in the combination meter. hicle damage or loss of control.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
If the engine is revving up to a hazardous
NSD347
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th speed in manual shift mode, the transmission
may shift up automatically. When the vehicle Cap (where fitted)
When shifting up, move the selector lever to the speed decreases, the transmission automati- Shift lock release
+ (up) side. (Shifts to higher range). cally shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before
When shifting down, move the selector lever to the vehicle comes to a stop. If the battery is discharged, the selector lever can-
the (down) side. (Shifts to lower range). not be moved from the P (Park) position even with
Accelerator downshift In the D (Drive) the brake pedal depressed and the ignition switch in
Moving the selector lever rapidly to the same position the ON position.
side twice will shift the ranges in succession.
For rapid passing or driving uphill, fully depress the To move the selector lever, remove the cap j 1
Use the 1st position when driving slowly on steep accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the trans- (where fitted) then push the shift lock release button
hills, slow driving through deep snow, sand or mission down into a lower gear, depending on the jA with a suitable tool j
2 (as illustrated) and press
mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep vehicle speed. the selector lever button j 3 . It is now possible to
downhill grades. move the selector lever to the N (Neutral) position
Use the 2nd, 3rd or 4th position when driving j4.
steep hills or for engine braking on steep down- For your safety, make sure the handbrake is applied
hill grades. and the brake pedal is depressed during the opera-
Use the 5th position for driving up or down long tion.
slopes. If there is any problem moving the lever out of the P
Use the 6th position for all normal forward driv- (Park) position, have a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop to check the automatic transmission sys-
ing. However, you need to shift down the gears
when accelerating or passing another vehicle. tem as soon as possible.

5-16 Starting and driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Fail-safe WARNING
Avoid revving up the engine while the vehicle
is stopped. This could cause unexpected ve-
AT models: hicle movement.
When the fail safe operation occurs, the vehicle
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the AT CHECK speed may be lower than other traffic, which
indicator light comes on for 2 seconds and the auto- could increase the chance of a collision. Be es-
Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Re-
verse) position while the vehicle is moving.
matic transmission will be locked in the third gear. pecially careful when driving. If necessary, drive This could cause serious damage to the trans-
Have a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop check to the side of the road at a safe place and away mission.
and repair the transmission. from traffic, to allow the transmission to return to
CVT models: normal operation, or have the transmission re- Start the engine in either the P (Park) or N
paired by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop, (Neutral) position. The engine will not start in
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the vehicle if necessary. any other position. If it does, have your ve-
speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
chance of transmission damage. Vehicle speed can DRIVING WITH CONTINUOUSLY workshop.
be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)
engine power may be limited. Have a NISSAN dealer (Models without manual shift) Shift into the P (Park) position and apply the
or qualified workshop check and repair the trans- handbrake when at a standstill for longer than
mission. The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) in a short waiting period.
your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce
AT or CVT models: maximum power and smooth operation.
Keep the engine at idling speed while shifting
from the N (Neutral) position to any driving
If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, The recommended operating procedures for this position.
such as excessive wheel spinning and subse- transmission are shown on the following pages. Fol-
quent hard braking, the Fail-safe system may be low these procedures for maximum vehicle perfor-
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade,
activated. This will occur even if all electrical cir- do not hold the vehicle by depressing the ac-
mance and driving enjoyment. celerator pedal. The footbrake pedal should
cuits are functioning properly. In this case, turn
the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 sec- be depressed in this situation.
WARNING
onds. Then turn the key back to the ON position. Starting vehicle
The vehicle should return to its normal operating Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This
condition. If it does not return to its normal oper- may cause a loss of control. 1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot-
ating condition have your NISSAN dealer or quali- brake pedal before moving the selector lever out
CAUTION of the P (Park) position.
fied workshop check the transmission and have
the transmission repaired by a NISSAN dealer or The cold engine idle speed is high, so use 2. Keep the footbrake pedal depressed and move
qualified workshop, if necessary. caution when shifting the transmission into a the selector lever to a driving position.
forward or reverse position before the engine
has warmed up. 3. Release the handbrake, the footbrake pedal, and
then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

Starting and driving 5-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


The CVT is designed so the footbrake pedal Shifting
MUST be depressed before shifting from the P
(Park) position to any driving position while the WARNING
ignition switch is in the ON position.
The selector lever cannot be moved out of the P
Apply the handbrake if the selector lever is in
any position while the engine is not running.
(Park) position and into any of the other posi- Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to
tions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK, move unexpectedly or roll away and result in
OFF or ACC position or if the key is removed. serious personal injury or property damage.
CAUTION
NSD397 If the selector lever cannot be moved from
DEPRESS THE FOOTBRAKE PEDAL - Shifting Left-Hand Drive (LHD) models
the P (Park) position while the engine is run-
the selector lever to D, R or L without de- ning and the footbrake pedal is depressed,
pressing the footbrake pedal causes the ve- the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning
hicle to move slowly when the engine is run- stop lights could cause an accident injuring
ning. Make sure the footbrake pedal is de- yourself and others.
pressed fully and the vehicle is stopped before After starting the engine, fully depress the footbrake
shifting the selector lever. pedal, push the selector lever button and move the
MAKE SURE OF THE SELECTOR LEVER POSI- selector lever out of the P (Park) position.
TION - Make sure the selector lever is in the If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or ACC
desired position. D and L are used to move position for any reason while the selector lever is in
forward and R to reverse. any positions other than the P (Park) position, the
NSD398
WARM UP THE ENGINE - Due to the higher
Right-Hand Drive (RHD) models
ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK posi-
idle speeds when the engine is cold, extra tion.
caution must be exercised when shifting the If the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK
selector lever into the driving position imme- Push the button jA while depressing position, perform the following steps:
diately after starting the engine. m the footbrake pedal.
1. Apply the handbrake.
Push the button j
A.
m 2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position while
depressing the footbrake pedal.
Just move the selector lever.
m
3. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position.
4. Models with Intelligent Key system:

5-18 Starting and driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. L (Low): ON position:
Models without Intelligent Key system: Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or For driving up or down long slopes where engine
driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or braking is necessary, or for powerful acceleration,
Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position. for maximum engine braking on steep downhill use the ON position. The transmission will automati-
P (Park): grades. cally select a different gear ratio, allowing the en-
Use this position when the vehicle is parked or when gine to provide high output.
starting the engine. Make sure that the vehicle is When driving conditions change, push the switch to
completely stopped and move the selector lever turn the SPORT mode off.
into the P (Park) position. Apply the handbrake.
Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended
When parking on a hill, first depress the footbrake
periods of time with the SPORT mode in the ON
pedal, apply the handbrake, and then move the se-
position. This reduces fuel economy.
lector lever into the P (Park) position.
R (Reverse): Accelerator downshift
Use this position to reverse. Make sure that the
- in the D position -
NSD399
vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R For passing or climbing hills, depress the accelera-
Left-Hand Drive (LHD) model
(Reverse) position. tor pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission
When the selector lever is in the R (Reverse) posi- SPORT mode switch down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle
speed.
tion, either the NISSAN Connect monitor (where fit- To select the SPORT mode, push the SPORT mode
ted) or the ultra sonic parking sensor (where fitted) switch with the selector lever in the D (Drive) posi-
will be activated. For details, see Rear-view moni- tion. The SPORT mode indicator light in the
tor (where fitted) or Around view monitor (where meter panel illuminates. To turn off the SPORT
fitted) earlier in this section or Ultrasonic Parking mode, push the SPORT mode switch again. The
Sensor (where fitted) later in this section SPORT mode indicator light will turn off. When the
N (Neutral): selector lever is shifted to any position other than D,
the SPORT mode will be automatically turned off.
Neither the forward nor reverse gear is engaged.
The engine can be started in this position. You may OFF position:
shift to the N (Neutral) position and restart a stalled For normal driving and fuel economy, use the OFF NSD400
engine while the vehicle is moving. position.
D (Drive):
Use this position for all normal forward driving.

Starting and driving 5-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Shift lock release For models with Intelligent Key system: If the battery quent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be
is discharged completely, the steering wheel cannot activated. This will occur even if all electrical cir-
1 LHD models
j be unlocked. Do not move the vehicle with the steer- cuits are functioning properly. In this case, place
2 RHD models
j ing wheel locked. the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait
for 10 seconds. Then turn the ignition switch back
A Shift lock release button
j If the selector lever cannot be moved out of the P
to the ON position. The vehicle should return to
(Park) position, have a NISSAN dealer or qualified
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the selec- its normal operating condition. If it does not re-
workshop check the CVT system as soon as pos-
tor lever may not move from the P (Park) position turn to its normal operating condition, have a
sible.
even with the brake pedal depressed and the selec- NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop check the
tor lever button pushed. transmission and repair it if necessary.
WARNING
To move the selector lever, perform the following
procedure: If the selector lever cannot be moved from the P WARNING
(Park) position while the engine is running and
1. Models with Intelligent Key system: When the fail-safe operation occurs, vehicle
the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may
speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced
Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause
speed may be lower than other traffic, which
position. an accident injuring yourself and others.
could increase the chance of a collision. Be es-
Models without Intelligent Key system: High fluid temperature protection mode pecially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to
the side of the road at a safe place and allow the
Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position, This transmission has a high fluid temperature pro-
transmission to return to normal operation, or
and remove the key if it is inserted. tection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too
have it repaired if necessary.
high (for example, when climbing steep grades in
2. Apply the handbrake. high temperature with heavy loads, such as when
3. Push down the shift lock release button j
A . Use towing a trailer), engine power and, under some
a suitable tool. conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased auto-
matically to reduce the chance of transmission dam-
4. Push and hold the selector lever button and move age. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the ac-
the selector lever to the N (Neutral) position while celerator pedal, but engine and vehicle speed may
holding down the shift lock release button. be limited.
Place the ignition switch in the ON position to un-
Fail-safe
lock the steering wheel. The vehicle may be moved
to the desired location. When the fail-safe operation occurs, the CVT will
not be shifted to the selected driving position.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions,
such as excessive wheel spinning and subse-

5-20 Starting and driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


STOP/START SYSTEM
(where fitted)

NISSAN GREEN PROGRAM *The Stop/Start System will **When the Stop/Start System symbol
The Stop/Start System is designed to prevent un- automatically stop the engine when all (1) is displayed the engine starts running
necessary fuel consumption, exhaust emissions, the following conditions are valid: automatically under at least one of the
and noise during a journey: following conditions:
The gearshift lever is in Neutral position.
When the vehicle comes to rest the engine is
The clutch pedal is fully released. The clutch pedal is depressed.
automatically stopped*.
The vehicle speed is below about 2 km/h (1 The brake pedal is repeatedly pressed (to main-
The engine is then automatically restarted before
MPH). tain vehicle braking performance).
you are ready to drive away**.
The drivers seat belt is buckled. The battery voltage becomes low (due to electri-
CAUTION cal load from other vehicle systems like head-
The drivers door is closed. lights, heaters, etc., or auxiliary devices con-
At the end of the journey the engine must be
stopped and ignition turned OFF. Lock the ve- NOTE nected to the 12 volt socket inside the vehicle).
hicle as normal. Turning the ignition OFF will shut The front and/or rear screen defogger is turned
The following conditions must also be satisfied
down all electrical systems. Failure to do this may on.
before the engine is automatically stopped. If the
result in a flat battery.
engine does not stop this does not indicate a The vehicle speed is above about 2 km/h (1
NORMAL OPERATION fault with the system: MPH).
The outside air temperature is above about NOTE
5C.
The following conditions will prevent the Stop/
The engine coolant temperature is at normal Start System automatically restarting the engine.
operating levels. Starting the engine by turning the ignition switch
The vehicle has driven some distance since is then necessary:
engine start. The drivers seat belt is unbuckled, or drivers
The battery voltage and temperature are door is open.
within normal levels. The bonnet is open.
NIC1640
The vehicle bonnet is closed. The Stop/Start System is always engaged at the
The steering wheel is not being turned. start of a journey (once the engine has been started).
The Stop/Start System has stopped the engine and The engine is automatically stopped and restarted
will automatically restart the engine. The Stop/Start The front and/or rear screen defoggers are during the journey if conditions are suitable
symbol j 1 is shown in the vehicle information dis- turned OFF.
play.

Starting and driving 5-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


When the engine is stopped the following informa- Push and hold
tion is displayed for a few seconds. the steering
See Vehicle information display in the 2. Instru- wheel j i button The message can

m
ments and controls section for information about to reset the only be cleared by
the display. [CO2 Saved] turning the ignition
value. OFF (or restarting
The display can the engine).

m
NOTE
be switched
Automatic engine
between Stop/
restart is possible

m
Start System
whenever the PRECAUTIONS
information and
Stop/Start System
drive computer The following message is displayed when there may
symbol is
information by a be something wrong with the Stop/Start System.
illuminated at the
short press of You are advised to have the system checked by a
bottom of the
the steering NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
display.
wheel j i button
Whilst the engine remains stopped the vehicle infor- The message can
mation display shows the accumulated quantity (es- When automatic restart is not possible the following be cleared by
timate) of carbon dioxide exhaust emissions pre- information is displayed. The engine must be started pressing the steer-
vented by the Stop/Start System. by turning the ignition switch. ing wheel ji button

m
The message can NOTE
be cleared by The Stop/Start
System symbol at

m
pressing the steer-
ing wheel j i but- the bottom of the
ton, restarting the display flashes
engine, or turning whilst the fault
the ignition OFF. condition remains.

The following information is displayed and a buzzer


sounded to remind the driver to turn the ignition
OFF to avoid a flat battery

5-22 Starting and driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


STOP/START SYSTEM OFF SWITCH Start System cannot prevent unnecessary fuel
consumption, exhaust emissions, or noise dur-
ing your journey.
NOTE
The following messages may be displayed for a
few seconds in the vehicle information display
when the Stop/Start System OFF switch is
pressed.
Stop/Start System Stop/Start System NIC1642

NIC1641
disengaged re-engaged

[Trip Saving]
The system can be temporarily disengaged by Estimated CO2 exhaust emissions prevented

m m
pressing the Stop/Start System OFF switch. Press- since last reset.
ing the button a second time will re-engage the
Stop/Start System. NOTE

When the Stop/Start System is disengaged The [Trip Saving] value is the same informa-
whilst the engine is running, the engine is pre- tion that is displayed when the engine is auto-
vented from automatically stopping. matically stopped by the Stop/Start System.

When the Stop/Start System is disengaged af- More information about the Stop/Start System can
ter the engine has been automatically stopped be checked using the [Settings] menu (see Instru-
by the Stop/Start System, the engine will imme- ments and Controls)
diately restart if suitable conditions are present
ENVIRONMENTAL SAVINGS
as described under NORMAL OPERATION.
The engine will then be prevented from automati- The vehicle information display keeps a record of
cally stopping during the same journey. the CO2 savings that can be viewed via the [Set-
tings] menu.
Whenever the Stop/Start System is disengaged
the indicator light on the Stop/Start System OFF See Vehicle information display in the 2. Instru-
NIC1643
switch illuminates. In this condition the Stop/ ments and controls section for information about
the display.

Starting and driving 5-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ULTRASONIC PARKING SENSOR FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
(where fitted) (where fitted)

[Total Saving]
Estimated CO2 exhaust emissions pre-
vented.
Time that the engine has been stopped by
the Stop/Start System.
NOTE
The [Total Saving] values cannot be reset
and show accumulated Stop/Start System
NSD300Z NSD297Z
information since the vehicle was built.
The Four Wheel Drive (4WD) system is used to
Ultrasonic sensors j A , fitted in the vehicles rear select 2WD, AUTO, or LOCK depending on the
bumper, measure the distance between the vehicle driving conditions.
and an obstacle when reversing. When reverse gear
The Four Wheel Drive (4WD) system controls the
is engaged a beeping sound is heard. The frequency
coupling operation. Turn the control (located on the
of the beeps will increase the closer you come to
centre console) to select each mode: 2WD, AUTO
the obstacle until, the sound becomes a constant
or LOCK depending on the driving conditions.
beep when, the vehicle is approximately 30 cm (12
in) from the obstacle. AUTO: Turn the 4WD mode control to the neutral
(AUTO) position and the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
NOTE
AUTO indicator light on the combination meter
This system is intended as an aid to reversing, illuminates.
to be used in conjunction with your rear view
2WD: Turn the control clockwise to the 2WD posi-
mirror.
tion.
Make sure that the ultrasonic sensors are not
LOCK: When the control is turned anticlockwise to
obscured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).
the LOCK position, it springs back to the AUTO
position when released. The 4WD LOCK mode in-
dicator light illuminates on the combination
meter, to show LOCK mode is engaged. To disen-
gage LOCK mode, turn the control anticlockwise
again to the LOCK position and release. The 4WD
LOCK mode indicator light will go out.

5-24 Starting and driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4WD MODE OPERATIONS CAUTION
Depending on the driving conditions, the 4WD
4WD mode
mode may automatically change from 2WD to
indicator light
4WD Mode Wheels driven Driving conditions 4WD even when the 2WD mode is selected.
( m ,m) Do not start the engine while in the 2WD, AUTO,
Front wheels- or LOCK mode:
2WD
The wheel drive mode is in
2WD when driving on a normal
Goes off For driving on dry, paved roads When on free-roller or jacking the front tyres
with the rear tyres on the ground.
road
Distribution of torque to the When towing with the rear tyres raised from
front and rear wheels changes the ground.
automatically, depending on
4WD SHIFT TIPS
AUTO

m
road conditions encountered For driving on paved or slippery roads
[ratio; 100:0 (2WD) 50:50
(4WD)]. This results in
If the 4WD mode control is operated while cor-
nering, accelerating or decelerating, or if the ig-
improved driving stability
nition is turned OFF while in the AUTO or LOCK
LOCK Four wheels*1 For driving on rough roads
position you may feel a jolt - this is normal.
m /m The oil temperature of power train parts will in-
*1
LOCK mode changes to AUTO mode automatically when the vehicle is sharply accelerated or when the vehicle speed crease if the vehicle is continuously operated
is over approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH). The 4WD LOCK indicator light goes off. Turning off the ignition automatically under conditions where the difference in rotation
cancels LOCK mode. between the front and rear wheels is large (wheel
slip), such as when driving the vehicle on rough
roads through sand or mud, or when freeing a
stuck vehicle. In these cases, the 4WD warning
light blinks rapidly, and the 4WD mode changes
to the 2WD condition to protect the power train
parts. If you stop the vehicle, with the engine
idling, and wait until the warning light stops blink-
ing the 4WD mode returns to the AUTO mode.
Braking distance in 4WD mode is the same as in
2WD mode.

Starting and driving 5-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Even if the mode automatically changes to AUTO 4WD WARNING LIGHT per second). Stop the vehicle in a safe place
mode, when driving in the LOCK mode, the indi- with the engine idling. If, after a while, the light
Warning light Indication
cator light stays in the LOCK mode. goes out you can continue driving.
CAUTION Where the difference in rotation between the
Only use the 4WD mode control when driving
in a straight direction (to select 2WD, AUTO or
LOCK).
m
Comes on
There is a malfunction in the Four-
Wheel Drive (4WD) system.
front and rear wheels is large (wheel slip) - such
as when driving on rough roads through sand,
mud, or freeing a stuck vehicle - the warning
light will blink slowly (approximately once per two
Do not use the 4WD mode control when turn- seconds). Set the 4WD mode to 2WD and do


ing or reversing.
Do not use the 4WD mode control with the
front wheels spinning (to select 2WD, AUTO,
m
Blinks rapidly
The power train oil temperature is
abnormally high.
not drive fast. A large difference in diameters
between the front and rear wheels will also cause
the 4WD warning light to blink slowly. Check
that all the tyre sizes are the same, the tyre pres-
or LOCK).
sures are correct, and that the tyres are not worn.
Be especially careful when starting or driving
on slippery surfaces with the 4WD mode set
to AUTO.
m
Blinks slowly
The difference in wheel rotation is
large. CAUTION
If the warning light comes on or blinks while
driving, 4WD mode will change to 2WD mode.
Do not drive on dry, hard surfaced roads in
The 4WD warning light is located in the tachometer. Reduce the vehicle speed and have your ve-
the LOCK position.
hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
The 4WD warning light comes on when the ignition workshop as soon as possible.
switch is turned to the ON position and turns off
soon after the engine is started. If the 4WD warning Do not drive on dry, hard surfaced roads in
light comes on, the 4WD mode indicator light will go the LOCK position.
out.
If the 4WD warning light blinks in the follow-
If the 4WD system malfunctions, or the revolution or ing sequence while driving, proceed as in-
radius of the front and the rear wheels differ, the structed:
warning light will either remain illuminated or blink Blinks rapidly (about twice a second)
as follows:
Pull off the road at a safe place and idle the
High temperature transfer case oil makes the engine. The driving mode will change to 2WD
warning light blink rapidly (approximately twice to prevent the 4WD system from malfunction-
ing. The vehicle can be driven again as soon
as the warning light turns off.

5-26 Starting and driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Blinks slowly (about once every 2 seconds) NOTE road vehicles can tip over sideways much more
easily than they can forwards or backwards.
Change the driving mode to 2WD and reduce The 4WD mode indicator light may blink while
the vehicle speed as soon as safely possible. shifting from one drive mode to another. Once Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. If you
shifting is completed, the 4WD mode indicator drive up them, you may stall. If you drive down
If the warning light is still on after performing
light will come on. If the indicator light does not them, you may not be able to control your speed.
the above operation, have the system
come on immediately, make sure that the area If you drive across them, you may roll over.
checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
around the vehicle is safe and free from ob-
workshop as soon as possible.
stacles. Drive the vehicle straight (DO NOT ac- Do not shift gears when driving on downhill
grades as this could cause loss of control of the
4WD MODE INDICATOR LIGHTS celerate, decelerate or reverse), then turn the
vehicle.
4WD mode control.
4WD mode indicator light (LOCK):
Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill. At the
If the 4WD warning lights comes on, the 4WD indi-
This light comes on when the ignition switch is top there could be a drop-off or other hazard that
cator light(s) will go out.
turned to the ON position, and turns off within 1 could cause an accident.
second. When selecting LOCK mode while the DRIVING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) If the engine of the vehicle stalls or you cannot
engine is running, this light will illuminate simul- SAFELY make it to the top of a steep grade, never at-
taneously along with the 4WD mode indicator
Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and off- tempt to turn around. Your vehicle could tip or
light (AUTO).
road use. However, avoid driving in deep water or roll over. Always drive backwards and straight
4WD mode indicator light (AUTO): mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for leisure down in R (Reverse) gear.
This light comes on when the ignition switch is use, unlike a conventional off-road vehicle. Never drive backwards under the following con-
turned to the ON position, and turns off within 1 Remember that Two-Wheel drive (2WD) models are ditions as this could result in loss of control:
second. If the engine is running, this light will illu- less capable than Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models with the gear lever in N (Neutral) and/or with
minate when selecting AUTO mode. for rough road driving and extrication when stuck, the clutch depressed and using the brake
The 4WD mode indicator light is located in the for example, in deep snow or mud. (MT models).
tachometer. Please observe the following precautions: with the selector lever in N (Neutral) and us-
The light should turn off within 1 second of the Drive carefully when off-road and avoid danger- ing only the brake (AT or CVT models).
ignition switch being turned to the ON position. ous areas. Always wear seat belts to help keep
you and your passengers in position when driv-
Heavy braking down a hill could cause your
While the engine is running, the 4WD mode indi- brakes to overheat and fade, resulting in loss of
cator light will display the position selected by ing over rough terrain. control and an accident. Apply the brakes lightly
the 4WD mode control. Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead drive and use a low gear to control your vehicle speed.
either straight up or straight down the slope. Off-

Starting and driving 5-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Unsecured cargo can be thrown around when Before operating the vehicle, ensure that the Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills. If you
driving over rough terrain. Properly secure it so driver and all passengers have their seat belts get out of the vehicle and it rolls forwards, back-
that it will not be thrown forwards and cause fastened. wards or sideways, you could be injured.
injury to you or your passengers.
Avoid raising the centre of gravity by loading
To avoid raising the centre of gravity excessively, things on the roof or equipping the vehicle with
do not exceed the rated capacity of the roof rack/ tyres larger than specified in this manual.
gear bin (where fitted) and evenly distribute the
load. Secure heavy loads in the luggage area as Always drive with the floor mats in place as the
floor may become very hot. Particular care
far forwards and as low as possible. Do not equip
should be taken if you are barefoot.
the vehicle with tyres larger than specified. This
could cause your vehicle to rollover. Lower your speed when encountering strong
crosswinds. With its higher centre of gravity your
Accelerating quickly, sharp steering manoeuvres
NISSAN is more affected by gusty side winds.
or sudden braking may cause loss of control.
Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control.
Do not drive beyond the performance of the
Be sure to check the brakes immediately after
tyres, even with 4WD. Sudden acceleration,
driving in mud or water as specified in Wet
steering or braking may result in loss of control
brakes later in this section.
and could cause the vehicle to become stuck.
If at all possible, avoid sharp turning manoeuvres, Whenever you drive off-road through sand, mud
or water as deep as the wheel hub, more fre-
particularly at high speeds. Your 4WD vehicle
quent maintenance may be required. For details,
has a higher centre of gravity than a 2WD ve-
refer to the separately provided Warranty Infor-
hicle and can tip over more easily. The vehicle is
mation and Maintenance Booklet.
not designed for cornering at the same speeds
as conventional 2WD models any more than low Rinse the underside of the vehicle with fresh
sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto- water after driving through mud or sand. Re-
rily under off-road conditions. Failure to operate move any brush or sticks that are trapped.
this vehicle correctly could result in loss of con-
trol and/or a rollover accident.
Install the same size of winter tyres on all four (4)
wheels (such as studless tyres) or install snow
Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering chains to the front wheels when driving on slip-
wheel when driving off-road. The steering wheel pery roads (e.g. after a snowfall) and drive care-
could jerk and injure your hands. Instead, drive fully using 4WD.
with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of
the rim.

5-28 Starting and driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CRUISE CONTROL (where fitted)

The cruise control system allows driving at constant When the cruise control system is on the speed lim-
speeds without keeping your foot on the accelerator iter cannot be operated.
pedal.
The cruise control system operation switches are
located on the steering wheel (right side).
WARNING
The cruise control system ONLY maintains a
constant vehicle speed, it does not replace
the driver.
Always observe the posted speed limits and
NSD375
do not set the speed above them.
Do not use the cruise control system when
6. CRUISE indicator
driving under the following conditions. Doing
so could cause a loss of vehicle control and 7. Cruise control symbol
NSD373
result in an accident.
8. SET indicator
When it is not possible to keep the vehicle
1. RES (Resume) switch 9. Set speed value
at a constant speed
2. SET switch The cruise control system operating condition is
When driving in heavy traffic
shown in the vehicle information display. For details,
3. CANCEL switch
When driving in traffic that varies speed see Cruise control/Speed limiter indicator (where
4. Speed limiter main ON/OFF switch (For fitted) in the 2. Instruments and controls section.
When driving in windy areas
details, see Speed limiter later in this sec-
When driving on winding or hilly roads tion) PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
When driving on slippery (rain, snow, ice, 5. Cruise control main ON/OFF switch
etc.) roads The cruise control system will be automatically
cancelled when there is a malfunction. Have the
CAUTION system checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
On manual transmission models, do not shift into fied workshop.
N (Neutral) without depressing the clutch pedal
when the cruise control is set. Should this occur,
To properly set the cruise control system, per-
form the steps as described in Cruise control
depress the clutch pedal and turn the cruise con- system operations later in this section.
trol main switch off immediately. Failure to do so
may cause engine damage.

Starting and driving 5-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. 2 km/h or 1 MPH for M9R diesel models
OPERATIONS The vehicle will maintain the set speed. Push and hold the RES (resume) j 1 switch up-
The cruise control system can be set at the follow- wards or the SET switch j 2 downwards. The
If the vehicle speed is less than the minimum set
ing speeds: vehicle speed will increase or decrease to the
speed (see table), it will not be possible to set
new set speed.
Minimum the cruise control system.
Engine type Maximum speed The new set speed value j
9 will be displayed in the
speed
Changing a cruising speed combination meter.
1.6 petrol MT: 170 km/h (100 MPH)
HR16DE 45 km/h CVT: 155 km/h (95 MPH) Use any one of the following methods to change the
cruising speed.
Passing another vehicle
2.0 petrol (30 MPH) MT: 185 km/h (110 MPH)
Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate. After
MR20DE CVT: 175 km/h (105 MPH)
Slow the vehicle as normal using the footbrake
releasing the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will re-
1.5 diesel 30 km/h pedal, the SET indicator j8 in the combination
166 km/h (70 MPH) turn to the previously set speed.
K9K (20 MPH) meter will be turned off.
2.0 diesel 30 km/h
170 km/h (106 MPH)
The set speed value j 9 will flash until the vehicle
M9R (18 MPH) When the vehicle reaches the desired cruising
returns to the previously set speed.
speed, push and release the SET switch j 2
1.6 diesel 40 km/h
R9M (25 MPH)
190 km/h (119 MPH) downwards. Cancelling the cruise control system
The new set speed value j 9 and SET indicator To cancel a set speed limit, push the CANCEL
Turning the cruise control system on j8 will be displayed in the combination meter. switch j
3 . The SET indicator j
8 in the combination
meter will be turned off.
The cruise control system can be switched on after Press the accelerator pedal.
engine start or when driving. The set speed value j 9 will remain displayed, as
When the vehicle reaches the desired cruising
Push the cruise control main switch j 5 . The speed, push and release the SET switch j 2 this speed is now stored in the cruise control sys-
CRUISE indicator and the cruise control symbol j 7 downwards. tem memory.
will illuminate in the combination meter display. The cruise control system will also be cancelled
The new set speed value j 9 and SET indicator
Setting a cruising speed j8 will be displayed in the combination meter. automatically by any of the following:

1. Accelerate to the desired cruising speed. Push and release the RES (resume) j 1 switch Pressing the footbrake pedal.

2 downwards and release


2. Push the SET switch j
upwards or the SET switch j 2 downwards to Pressing the clutch pedal.
increase or decrease the set speed in steps of:
it. Moving the gear lever (MT models) or selector
1 km/h or 1 MPH for petrol models or R9M die- lever (AT or CVT models) to the N (Neutral) posi-
3. The SET indicator j8 and the set speed value
sel models tion.
j9 will be displayed in the combination meter
display. 2 km/h or 23 MPH K9K diesel models

5-30 Starting and driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SPEED LIMITER

If the vehicle slows down more than approxi- The speed limiter allows you to set the desired ve-
mately 12 km/h (8 MPH) below the set speed. hicle speed limit. While the speed limiter is acti-
vated, you can perform normal braking and accel-
Resuming a previous cruising speed eration, but the vehicle will not exceed the set speed.
If the cruising speed has been cancelled, the set When the vehicle reaches the set speed limit or if
speed value j 9 will remain displayed in the combi- the set speed limit is lower than the actual vehicle
nation meter and the speed will be stored in the speed, the accelerator pedal will not work until the
cruise control system memory. This cruising speed vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit.
can be reactivated by pressing the RES (Resume)
switch j1 upwards.
WARNING NSD373
If the vehicle speed is less than the minimum set
speed (see table), it will not be possible to re- The speed limiter will not automatically brake
sume to the cruising speed. the vehicle to the set speed limit. 1. RES + (Resume) switch

Turn the cruise control system off Always observe posted speed limits. Do not 2. SET (Set) switch
set the speed above them.
3. CANCEL switch
The cruise control system will be turned off when
one of the following operations is performed: Always confirm the setting status of the speed
4. Speed limiter main ON/OFF switch
limiter in the combination meter display.
Push the cruise control main ON/OFF switch
When the speed limiter is set, avoid hard ac-
5. Cruise control main ON/OFF switch (For
j5 . The cruise control symbol j 7 , the CRUISE details, see Cruise control (where fitted)
celeration to reach the set limit to ensure that
indicator j
6 , the SET indicator j 8 , and the set earlier in this section)
the system can limit the speed of the vehicle
speed value j 9 will turn off in the combination
correctly. The speed limiter operation switches are located on
meter display
the steering wheel (right hand side)
Push the speed limiter main ON/OFF switch When additional floor mats are used, be sure
that they are correctly secured and that they
j 5 . The cruise control system information in the
cannot interfere with the accelerator pedal.
combination meter will be replaced with the
Mats not adapted to the vehicle may prevent
speed limiter information. For details see Speed
proper operation of the speed limiter.
limiter later in this section.
When the speed limiter is on the cruise control sys-
When the vehicle is stopped and the ignition is
tem cannot be operated.
turned to the off position.
Turning off the cruise control system will erase
the cruise control system memory.

Starting and driving 5-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SPEED LIMITER OPERATIONS For 1.5 diesel (K9K) models only:
The speed limiter can be set at the following speeds: When driving less than 30 km/h (20 MPH), it will not
be possible to set the speed limit.
Minimum
Engine type Maximum speed When the speed limit is set, the SET indicator j8
speed
1.6 petrol and the set speed value j
9 will be displayed in the
170 km/h (105 MPH) combination meter display.
HR16DE
2.0 petrol MT: 190 km/h (118 MPH) Changing a speed limit
MR20DE CVT: 170 km/h (105 MPH)
1.5 diesel 30 km/h Use either of the following operations to change an
NSD372 184 km/h (114 MPH) active speed limit:
K9K (20 MPH)
2.0 diesel
200 km/h (125 MPH)
For 1.6 petrol (HR16DE), 2.0 petrol (MR20DE),
The speed limiter operating condition is shown in M9R 2.0 diesel (M9R) or 1.6 diesel (R9M) models:
the vehicle information display. For details, see
Vehicle information display in the 2. Instruments
1.6 diesel
R9M
190 km/h (118 MPH) Push and release the RES (Resume) switch j 1
upwards or SET switch j 2 downwards. Each
and controls section.
time you do this, the set speed will increase or
6. LIMIT indicator
Turning the speed limiter on decrease by 1 km/h (1 MPH).
The speed limiter can be switched on after engine
7. Speed limiter symbol
start or when driving.
Push and hold the RES (Resume) switch j 1
upwards or SET switch j 2 downwards. The set
8. SET indicator
Push the speed limiter main ON/OFF switch j 4. speed will increase or decrease to the next mul-
9. Set speed value The speed limiter symbol j 7 and the LIMIT indica- tiple of 10 km/h (10 MPH) and then in steps of
tor j
6 will illuminate in the combination meter dis- 10 km/h (10 MPH).
play. For 1.5 diesel (K9K) models only:
Setting speed limit Push and release the RES (Resume) switch j 1
Push the SET switch j
2 (downwards) upwards or SET switch j 2 downwards. Each
time you do this, the set speed will increase or
For 1.6 petrol (HR16DE), 2.0 petrol (MR20DE), decrease by 2 km/h (2 MPH).
2.0 diesel (M9R) or 1.6 diesel (R9M) models:
The speed limit will be set at the current speed. Push and hold the RES (Resume) switch j 1
upwards or SET switch j 2 downwards. The set
When driving less than 30 km/h (20 MPH), the speed will increase or decrease in steps of 4
speed limiter will be set to the minimum possible km/h (2-3 MPH).
set speed of 30 km/h (20 MPH).

5-32 Starting and driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PARKING

The new set speed limit value j9 will be displayed This speed limit can be reactivated by pressing the
in the combination meter display. RES (Resume) switch j 1 upwards. WARNING

Cancelling a speed limit If the current vehicle speed is higher than the previ- Do not park the vehicle over flammable mate-
ous set speed, the accelerator pedal will not work rials, such as dry grass, waste paper, or rags.
To cancel a set speed limit, push the CANCEL and the set speed value j 9 will flash until the vehicle They may ignite and cause a fire.
switch j
3 . The SET indicator j 8 in the combination
meter will be turned off. The set speed value j
9 will
speed drops below the set speed limit. Safe parking procedures require that:
remain displayed. Turning the speed limiter off The handbrake is applied.
It is also possible to override the speed limiter by The speed limiter system will be turned off when The gear lever is placed in an appropriate
fully depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the one of the following operations is performed: gear for manual transmission models.
resistance point.
Push the speed limiter main ON/OFF switch The selector lever is placed in the P (Park)
j4 . The speed limiter symbol j 7 , the LIMIT indi- position for automatic transmission or con-
WARNING cator j6 , the SET indicator j 8 , and the set tinuously variable transmission models.
The vehicle may accelerate when the speed speed value j 9 will turn off in the combination
Failure to follow the above recommenda-
limiter cancels. meter display.
tions could cause the vehicle to move un-
When additional floor mats are used, be sure Push the cruise control main ON/OFF switch expectedly or roll away and result in an
that they are correctly secured and that they j5 . The speed limiter information in the combi- accident.
cannot interfere with the accelerator pedal. nation meter will be replaced with the cruise con-
Mats not adapted to the vehicle may prevent trol information. For details see Cruise control Never leave the engine running while the ve-
hicle is unattended.
proper operation of the speed limiter. (where fitted) earlier in this section.
Fully depress the accelerator pedal beyond the re- When the vehicle is stopped and the ignition is Do not leave children or adults who would
normally require the support of others alone
sistance point. The speed limiter will be suspended turned to the off position.
in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left
to allow driving above the set speed. The set speed Turning off the speed limiter will erase the set alone either. On hot, sunny days, tempera-
value j 9 will flash. The speed limiter will automati- speed limit memory. tures in a closed vehicle could quickly be-
cally resume when the vehicle speed drops below come high enough to cause severe or possi-
the set speed limit. Speed limiter malfunction bly fatal injuries to people or animals.
Resuming a previous set speed If the speed limiter malfunctions, the set indicator
j8 in the combination meter display will flash. Manual transmission models:
If a set speed limit has been cancelled, the set speed Depress the clutch pedal and place the gear
value j 9 will remain displayed in the combination Turn the speed limiter off by pushing the speed lim-
lever in the R (Reverse) position. When parking
meter and the speed will be stored in the speed lim- iter main ON/OFF switch j 4 and have the system
on an uphill gradient, place the gear lever in the
iter memory. checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
1st (Low gear) position.

Starting and driving 5-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Automatic transmission or Continuously vari-
able transmission models:
Fully depress the brake pedal and move the se-
lector lever to the P (Park) position.

WARNING
Make sure that the selector lever has been
pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be
moved without depressing the button on the se-
lector lever handle.

NSD338 NSD339

LHD models RHD models

5-34 Starting and driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


TRAILER TOWING

When parked on a sloping driveway, turn the Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop
wheels so the vehicle will not roll into the street to carry passengers and luggage. for more information on this matter.
in case it moves.
Remember that towing a trailer will place additional The trailer must be loaded so that heavy goods
FACING DOWNHILL: j
1 loads on your vehicles engine, drive-train, steering, are distributed over the axle and as low in the
braking and other systems. Towing a trailer will also trailer as possible. Poor load distribution can se-
Turn the wheels into the kerb, allow the vehicle
exaggerate other conditions, such as sway caused riously affect the stability of the trailer and tow
to move forward until the kerb side wheel gently
by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing vehicle.
touches the kerb. Then set the handbrake.
trucks. Driving style and speed must be adjusted
FACING UPHILL: j
2 according to the circumstances. Before towing a Do not exceed the maximum permitted vertical
load on the trailer hitch.
trailer, see a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop
Turn the wheels away from the kerb and allow
the vehicle to move back until the kerb side wheel
for an explanation of towing equipment and its Before driving, make sure that the lighting sys-
proper use. tem of the trailer works properly.
gently touches the kerb. Then set the handbrake.
NO KERB FACING DOWNHILL OR UPHILL: OPERATING PRECAUTIONS When towing with 4WD models, the 4WD mode
switch should be in the AUTO position. Using
3
j Avoid towing a trailer during the running-in the vehicle in AUTO mode gives better traction,
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so schedule. particularly when moving off from stationary and/
the vehicle will move away from the centre of the Choose proper coupling devices (trailer hitch, or on an incline, as the vehicle is less likely to
road if it moves. Then set the handbrake. safety chain, roof carrier, etc.) for your vehicle wheel spin.
and trailer. These devices are available from a
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop where you
Avoid abrupt starts, accelerations and stops.
and remove the key/Intelligent Key (where fit-
ted). can also obtain more detailed information about Avoid sharp turns and lane changes.
trailer towing.
Always turn off ignition after parking a vehicle Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed.
Heavy-duty kits are available at a NISSAN dealer
with Stop/Start System fitted to avoid a possible
or qualified workshop.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and
flat battery. trailer when parking. Apply the handbrake (where
NOTE It is advisable to contact a NISSAN dealer or fitted) on the trailer. Parking on a steep slope is
qualified workshop for towing details, before not recommended.
The Stop/Start System is designed to prevent towing a trailer up steep slopes for long dis- If parking on a steep slope is unavoidable it is
unnecessary fuel consumption, exhaust emis- tances. also advisable to put the vehicle into gear, or
sions and noise during a journey. The Stop/
Start System does not automatically turn off Never allow the total trailer load (trailer weight select P (Park (AT or CVT models), and turn the
plus its cargo weight) to exceed the maximum front wheels into the kerb (in addition to the other
ignition at the end of a journey. precautions described). Before parking on a
set for the coupling device.

Starting and driving 5-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


steep slope consider the incline (the towing SAFETY CHAINS Follow all of the coupling device manufacturers in-
weights quoted are for a 12% slope). structions for installation and use.
Always use a suitable chain between the vehicle
Follow the trailer manufacturers instructions. and trailer. The chain should be attached to the hitch
and not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to
Have your vehicle serviced more often than at
leave enough slack in the chain to permit turning
the intervals specified in the separately provided
Warranty Information and Maintenance booklet. corners. The chain should not drag on the ground:
passing the chain across the trailer hitch may be the
Trailer towing requires more fuel than under nor- best practice depending on your trailer.
mal circumstances because of a considerable
increase in traction power required and resis- TRAILER BRAKES
tance. Ensure that trailer brakes are installed as required
When towing a trailer, observe the following re- by local regulations. Also check that all other trailer
equipment conforms to local regulations.
stricted towing speed:
Speed: below 100 km/h (62 MPH) TRAILER DETECTION (where fitted)
CAUTION When towing a trailer and the turn signal switch is
While towing a trailer, check the engine coolant used, the electrical system of the vehicle will detect
temperature gauge regularly to prevent engine an additional electrical load of the trailer lighting. As
overheating. a result, the trailer direction indicator light comes
on.
TYRE PRESSURE
INSTALLATION OF COUPLING
When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tyres to the
maximum recommended COLD tyre pressure, as
DEVICE
indicated on the tyre placard (for full loading). Make NISSAN recommends that the coupling device for
sure the trailer tyre pressures are correct. trailer towing be installed under the following condi-
tions:
CAUTION
Do not tow a trailer when the vehicle is installed Maximum permissible vertical load on the cou-
pling device: 736 N (75 kg, 165 lb)
with a temporary-use spare tyre.
The coupling device, mounting points and instal-
lation parts on your vehicle: as shown as an ex-
ample in the illustration.

5-36 Starting and driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


NSD348

I 5seater
j Rear overhang of coupling device:
II 7seater
j 5seater 925 mm (36.4 in)
A
j
7seater 977 mm (38.5 in)

Starting and driving 5-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


VEHICLE SECURITY POWER STEERING SYSTEM

When leaving your vehicle unoccupied: overheating. No servicing is required. The EPAS
WARNING system will return to normal operation the next time
Always remove the ignition key or Intelligent Key
(where fitted) and take it with you even in your If the Electrically Power Assisted Steering the vehicle is driven.
own garage. warning light (EPAS) illuminates while driv- Similarly, the EPAS system may not provide full as-
ing, the power assist for steering will be dis- sistance during periods of reduced battery voltage
Close all windows completely and lock all doors. abled. Greater steering efforts are required to but will recover once normal battery voltage is re-
Always park your vehicle where it can be seen. operate the steering wheel, especially in stored.
At night, park in a well lit area. sharp turns and at low speed. Stop the ve-
hicle as soon as safely possible and contact a If the EPAS warning light comes on while the engine
If the vehicle is equipped with an alarm or immo- NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for fur- is running, it may indicate that the EPAS system is
bilization device, use it even for short periods. ther assistance. not working properly. As result greater steering ef-
forts are required to steer the steering wheel, espe-
Do not leave children and pets in the vehicle In certain circumstances, factors external to cially in sharp turns and at low speeds. Have the
unattended. the EPAS system may contribute to the illumi- system checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
Do not leave valuables on view to tempt a thief. nation of the warning light. If the warning light
illuminates, stop the vehicle as soon as safely
workshop as soon as possible.
Always take your valuables with you. If you must
leave something in your vehicle, lock it in the lug- possible if driving. Turn the ignition switch to NOTE
gage compartment or hide it out of sight. the OFF position and wait for approximately Incorrectly inflated tyres can lead to poor steer-
20 seconds, then turn the ignition switch to ing ability and make the driver suspect a steering
Do not leave the vehicle documents in your ve- the ON position again. If the light remains illu- problem: keep the vehicles tyres inflated to the
hicle. In the unfortunate event of your vehicle minated, we recommend you to contact a
being stolen, the documents will only help a thief correct pressure at all times.
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. See
to sell the vehicle. Warning/indicator lights and audible CAUTION
Do not leave articles on a roof rack as they are reminders in the 2. Instruments and Any malfunction or accident that could have dam-
particularly vulnerable. If possible, remove them controls section for further details regarding aged the steering components (including actual
from the rack and lock them inside the vehicle. the EPAS warning light. or attempted theft damage) should be reported
to a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
Do not leave the spare key or Intelligent Key in The EPAS (Electrically Power Assisted Steering)
the vehicle keep it in a safe place at home. system is designed to assist steering.

Do not leave a note of your vehicles key number The steering may appear to feel slightly stiff follow-
in the vehicle. A thief may break into the vehicle, ing parking manoeuvres including a great deal of
note the key number and return with a new key steering. This is not a malfunction; it is caused by a
and drive the vehicle. control system designed to prevent the motor from

5-38 Starting and driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


BRAKE SYSTEM

The brake system has two separate hydraulic cir- hill gradient. Overheated brakes may reduce brak- ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
cuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have ing performance and could result in loss of vehicle
braking ability with two wheels. control. WARNING
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a so-
Vacuum assisted brake While driving on a slippery surface, be careful phisticated device, but it cannot prevent acci-
when braking, accelerating or downshifting. dents resulting from careless or dangerous
The brake booster aids braking by using engine Abrupt braking actions or sudden acceleration driving techniques. It can help maintain ve-
vacuum. If the engine stops or the drive belt is bro- could cause the wheels to skid and result in an hicle control during braking on slippery sur-
ken, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the accident. faces. Remember that stopping distances
brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow
brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and Be aware that brakes will fade if repeated heavy covered roads, or if you are using snow
the stopping distance will be longer. brake applications are made. chains. Always maintain a safe distance from
Driving uphill the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the
Wet brakes
driver is responsible for safety.
When the vehicle is washed or driven through wa- When starting on a steep gradient, it is sometimes
ter, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your brak- difficult to operate the brake (AT or CVT models) or Tyre type and condition may also affect brak-
ing distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull both the brake and clutch (MT models). Use the ing effectiveness.
to one side during braking. handbrake to hold the vehicle. Do not slip the clutch When replacing tyres, install the specified
(MT models). When ready to start, slowly release size of tyres on all four wheels.
To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed the handbrake while depressing the accelerator
while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the pedal and releasing the clutch (MT models) or de- When installing a spare tyre, make sure it
brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. pressing the accelerator pedal (AT or CVT models). is the proper size and type as specified on
Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the the tyre placard. See Vehicle
brakes function correctly. Driving downhill identification in the 9. Technical
The engine braking action is effective for controlling information section for the tyre placard
Using the brakes location.
the vehicle while descending hills.
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
The gear lever (MT models) should be placed in a For detailed information, see Wheels and
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the
gear position low enough to obtain sufficient engine tyres in the 8. Maintenance and
brake linings and pads faster and reduce fuel
braking. do-it-yourself section.
economy performance.
For the AT or CVT models, a low gear position in The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes
the manual shift mode, low enough to obtain suffi- brakes so that the wheels do not lock during hard
from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a
cient engine braking, should be selected. braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. The
lower gear before going down a slope or long down-
system detects the rotation speed at each wheel

Starting and driving 5-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ELECTRONIC STABILITY
PROGRAMME (ESP) SYSTEM
(where fitted)
and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each Normal operation When accelerating, driving on slippery surfaces or
wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each suddenly avoiding obstacles on roads, the vehicle
wheel from locking, the system helps the driver to The ABS will not initiate at speeds below 5 to 10 might swerve or slip. The Electronic Stability Pro-
maintain steering control and helps to minimise km/h (3 to 6 MPH). The speeds will vary according gramme (ESP) system continuously monitors and
swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces. to road conditions. compares the drivers intended speed and the travel
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are direction. The system adjusts wheel brake pressure
Using the system close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and and engine torque to assist in improving vehicle sta-
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to bility.
the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a
not pump the brakes. The ABS will operate to pre- pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from
When the ESP system is operating, the SLIP
indicator light ( ) in the combination meter
vent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to the actuator under the bonnet when it is operating. blinks.
avoid obstacles. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is working
properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that When only the traction control (TCS) system in
WARNING road conditions are hazardous and extra care is re- the ESP system is operating, the SLIP indica-
quired while driving. tor light ( ) in the combination meter will also
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may in- blink.
crease the stopping distance.
If the SLIP indi